JP2012165816A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine configured to prevent a player from recognize a game status based on a signal output outside the game machine.SOLUTION: A jackpot game status has a round 1, and in the round, an apparent sudden winning probability oscillation jackpot is prepared in which a jackpot pocket is controlled to be opened in a manner similar to that when winning a small prize and winning a sudden winning probability oscillation jackpot. A game control microcomputer 560 outputs a signal of a jackpot 3 outside the game machine, after a predetermined period in which the jackpot pocket is controlled to be opened in a manner similar to that when winning the small prize and winning the sudden winning probability oscillation jackpot, in the jackpot game status based on the apparent sudden winning probability oscillation jackpot.

Description

  The present invention starts variable display of a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified based on the fact that a start condition permitting the start of variable display is satisfied after the game medium passes through the start area, and displays the display result. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that includes a variable display unit that performs derivation display, and is capable of shifting to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display unit.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, which is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device. Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific game state has a right to be in an advantageous state for a player who easily wins a game medium (a big hit game state), for example, a state of a special variable prize-winning device, or a state advantageous for a player. A state in which a predetermined game value such as a state or a state in which a condition for giving out premium game media is easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as identification information is a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When a big win occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game medium shifts to a specific gaming state (a big winning gaming state) where the game medium is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. An opening time (for example, 30 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, even when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area, it is configured so that a predetermined game value is given to the player, assuming that a big win has occurred, and the identification information When the display result of the variable display device for displaying the symbol as a special display result determined in advance is, it is configured to give a player less game value than when a big hit occurs Yes (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Note that the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as identification information becomes a special display result determined in advance is usually referred to as “small hit”. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when a big win occurs based on the winning of a game ball in a predetermined winning area, a small win occurs in the opening mode in the first opening period of the big winning opening. In this case, the opening mode is similar to the opening mode, and information indicating that a big hit has occurred after the end of the first opening period of the big prize opening is output to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In addition, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of jackpots are prepared with different numbers of rounds of jackpot games and different ways of opening the big prize opening (see Patent Document 2). The gaming machine described in Patent Document 2 is also executed when playing a big hit game with a large number of rounds (15 rounds of big hit game), or when playing a big hit game with a small number of rounds (two rounds of big hit game). The opening mode of the big prize opening in the round (for example, the first round) is the opening mode of the big winning opening in the big hit game with a small number of rounds.

JP 2010-166983 A (paragraphs 0227, 0228, 0274 to 0277, 0390 to 0392, FIGS. 60 to 64, and FIG. 68) JP2009-112375A (paragraphs 03831-0383, FIG. 72)

  Some gaming machines are configured to output a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the gaming medium is paid out so that the number of gaming medium paid out can be managed externally. .

  When the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 and the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2 are configured to output a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the gaming medium is paid out, If the game medium is paid out in accordance with the winning of the game medium in one specific gaming state and the game medium is again transferred to the specific gaming state before the game medium is paid out, the game medium is paid out in accordance with the winning of the game medium in any specific gaming state. There arises a problem that it becomes difficult to manage outside of the gaming machine whether it has been done.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately grasping externally which gaming medium has been paid out in accordance with the fulfillment of a payout condition in any gaming state.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention allows a variable display to start after a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through a start area (for example, the first start winning port 13 and the second start winning port 14). A plurality of types that can be distinguished from each other based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied (for example, neither the variable display of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is executed, nor is the big hit gaming state) Variable display unit (for example, first special symbol display 8a, second special symbol display 8b) that starts variable display of identification information (for example, first special symbol, second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result. And a game machine capable of shifting to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display unit. Special The first specific game state (for example, a big hit game state based on sudden probability change big hit or a small hit game state based on small hit) and a second specific game state (for example, big hit game based on sudden hitting big hit) having different advantages in the game state State), and a variable prize device (for example, a special variable prize) that changes between a first state in which a game medium can enter (for example, an open state) and a second state in which a game medium cannot enter (for example, a closed state). Ball device 20) and advantageous game state signal external output means (for example, for game control) for outputting an advantageous game state signal (for example, three jackpot signals) to the outside of the gaming machine when controlled to the second specific game state In the microcomputer 560 that executes steps S1044 to S1046 and the first specific gaming state, the first pattern (for example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 2) The variable winning device is controlled in a pattern that is opened for 0.052 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds), and then a second pattern different from the first pattern (for example, the special variable winning ball device 20 is 25 seconds) Alternatively, variable winning device control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, set in step S135A or step S1474) that controls the variable winning device in a 29.5 second open state followed by a 2 second closed state). And a step of executing steps S1410, S1461, and S1468 based on the release pattern data), and the advantageous game state signal external output means is based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled in the first pattern in the second specific game state. Later, an advantageous gaming state signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, a gaming control microcomputer). The computer 560 executes step S1046 based on the determination that the value of the big hit three signal timer set in step S136 becomes 0 in step S1044, or that the big hit three signal output flag is set in step S1459B. The game machine further executes a predetermined payout condition (for example, the first start winning port 13, the second starting winning port 14, the big winning port, the normal winning port). 29, 30), a payout execution means (for example, a ball payout device 97) for executing payout of game media, and a predetermined number of minutes (for example, 10 pieces) when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. ) A payout condition establishment signal (for example, a winning signal) indicating that a predetermined payout condition for paying out the game medium is output to the outside of the gaming machine. That payout condition fulfillment signal external output means (e.g., step S1021~S1023 in the gaming control microcomputer 560, portions for performing the S1102, S1103), characterized in that it comprises a. According to such a configuration, it is possible to accurately ascertain externally which game medium has been paid out in accordance with the fulfillment of the payout condition in which gaming state.

(Means 2) In the means 1, in the specific gaming state, the variable winning device control means does not control the variable winning device in the first pattern but is controlled in the second pattern by the variable winning device control means (for example, the 15R normal big hit or the For determining a specific gaming state for determining whether or not to enter a specific gaming state and the type of the specific gaming state based on the passing of the game medium through the starting area. Numerical data extraction means for extracting numerical data (for example, jackpot determination random number (random R), jackpot type determination random number (random 1)) (for example, a part for executing steps S215A and S215B in the game control microcomputer 560) And a variable display of identification information that has passed through the start area but the start condition is not met. The numerical data for determining the specific gaming state extracted by the numerical data extraction means is stored as the reserved memory, up to the number (for example, 8 which is the sum of the upper limit number 4 of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). The reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer) and the specific game state determination numerical data stored in the reserved storage means based on the establishment of the start condition Specific game state determination means at the start time (for example, step in the microcomputer 560 for game control) that determines whether or not to enter the game state and the type of the specific game state before the display result of the variable information identification display is derived and displayed A portion for executing S61, S62, S73) and for determining a specific gaming state extracted by the numerical data extraction means when the game medium passes through the starting area. Using the value data, a start specific game state determination means for determining whether or not the specific game state is entered and the type of the specific game state in the case of entering the specific game state (for example, step S220 in the game control microcomputer 560) Whether to execute a prior notice effect (for example, continuous notice effect) for notifying the possibility of entering the specific game state based on the determination result of the start specific game state determination means. Advance notice determining means (for example, the part of step S800A in the production control microcomputer 100) that determines whether or not the advance notice determining means determines to execute the advance notice effect, the starting specific gaming state determining means The advance notice for executing the advance notice effect before the variable display of the identification information subject to the determination is executed. Notification advancement execution means (for example, a portion of step S8107 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the advance notice determination means uses the first specific game state and the second specific game state by the start specific game state determination means. It is determined that the advance notice effect is to be executed on the condition that it is determined not to be performed (for example, the processing after step S6013 is executed on the condition that “Y” is obtained in the processing of step S6009 shown in FIG. 66). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly recognizing the type of the specific gaming state by the advance notice effect.

(Means 3) According to the time (for example, 37.88 seconds) from the start of control of the gaming state to the second specific gaming state until the start of control of the variable winning device in the second pattern in the means 1 or 2 Based on the value setting means (for example, the part that executes step S136 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the value set by the value setting means, the control is started to the second specific gaming state. Including a predetermined time determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed until the variable winning device starts control in the second pattern (for example, a part for executing step S1044 in the game control microcomputer 560). When the advantageous game state signal external output means is controlled to the second specific game state, the predetermined time determination means starts control to the second specific game state. Control to output an advantageous gaming state signal to the outside of the gaming machine when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since then (for example, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines “Y” in step S1044) (Step S1046 is executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the type of the specific gaming state at an early stage without increasing the processing load of the game control means.

(Means 4) In the means 1 or 2, the control start determining means for determining whether or not the variable winning device is controlled to start in the second pattern in the second specific gaming state (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, The advantageous game state signal external output means determines that the variable winning device has been started to control in the second pattern when controlled to the second specific game state. Sometimes control to output an advantageous gaming state signal to the outside of the gaming machine is started (for example, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines “Y” in step S1059A, the jackpot three-signal output flag is set in step S1059B. Set Step S1046 based on the fact that the jackpot 3 signal output flag is set. To) may be configured so. In such a case, the advantageous game state signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine at a timing according to the control state of the variable winning device by the variable winning device control means, and the type of the specific gaming state is early by the player. Can be prevented from being recognized.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the variable winning device control means controls the variable winning device in the second pattern after controlling the variable winning device in the first pattern in one round game. The variable winning device can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 can control the special variable winning ball device 20 in the open pattern shown in FIGS. 21 (3) and 36), and an advantageous gaming state signal The external output means starts control to output an advantageous gaming state signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the variable winning device is controlled in the second pattern (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 560 sets in step S136). Step S1046 is executed based on the determination that the value of the big hit three-signal timer has become 0 in Step S1044, And executes step S1046 based on that it is determined that a period of long time open based on the opening pattern data set in flop S135A or step S1474) may be configured so. In such a configuration, even in the one round game, the game medium can be won in the variable prize device, and the game interest of the player can be improved.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is the rear view which looked at the gaming machine from the back. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the output port in a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in a game control means. It is a circuit diagram which shows the internal structure of a terminal board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of a hot start process. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the opening pattern of a big prize opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the opening pattern of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball command output counter addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball command output counter addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball counter subtraction process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of open pattern data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of open pattern data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of open pattern data. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each 2 byte buffer formed in RAM used by switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of a switch process. It is a flowchart which shows a switch normal / abnormality check process. It is a block diagram which shows the various signals output to a terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows a winning timer set process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the output timing of a highly accurate middle signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the output timing of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the output timing of three jackpot signals. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of 1 structure of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous notice effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a continuous notice allocation table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a big winning opening release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process during big prize opening opening | release. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process during big prize opening opening | release. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of an information output process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the fourth special symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol is kept lit in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. . When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the fourth special symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is kept lit in a display color reminiscent of the big hit (for example, red).

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be able to open and close the wings, and when the wings are open, the game ball is likely to win a prize (open state), and when the wings are not open (closed). The game ball becomes difficult to win (closed state). The game ball won in the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by a second start opening switch 14a (for example, a proximity switch), and a winning confirmation switch 14b. (For example, a photo sensor). In this embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the second start port switch 14a, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a prize ball payout is executed. Further, as will be described later, the presence or absence of occurrence of an abnormal winning is determined based on the detection result of the winning confirmation switch 14b in addition to the detection result of the second start opening switch 14a, and the occurrence of the abnormal winning is detected. A security signal is output externally. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16.

  For each of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, a start opening switch (for example, a proximity switch) may be provided and a winning confirmation switch (for example, a photo sensor) may be provided. Then, for each of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variation display of the special symbol is started based on the detection of the game ball by the start opening switch as in this embodiment. A ball payout may be executed. Further, for each of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred is determined based on the detection result of the winning confirmation switch in addition to the detection result by the start opening switch, as in this embodiment. A security signal may be output to the outside based on the determination and the occurrence of an abnormal winning.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14 (easier to start winning), and is in an advantageous state for the player. Become. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In this embodiment, only the second start winning opening 14 is provided with a winning confirmation switch 14b in addition to the second start opening switch 14a. However, in addition to the count switch 23, the big winning opening is also provided. A winning confirmation switch may be provided. In this case, for example, the count switch 13 may be configured by using a proximity switch and the winning confirmation switch may be configured by using a photosensor as in the case of the second start winning opening 14 (inversely, counting The switch 13 may be configured using a photo sensor, and the winning confirmation switch may be configured using a proximity switch, or a mechanical switch such as a micro switch may be used instead of the proximity switch or the photo sensor). Further, the game control microcomputer may perform the payout of the winning ball based only on the detection result of the count switch 23 in the winning ball payout process based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening (step). (See S32). On the other hand, the game control microcomputer, when performing an abnormal winning to the big winning opening, may make a determination based on both the detection result of the count switch 23 and the detection result of the winning confirmation switch. . In this case, for example, in the game control microcomputer, the difference between the detected number of the count switch 23 and the detected number of the winning confirmation switch is a predetermined value (for example, 10) according to the same process as the switch normal / abnormal check process described later. Based on what has been described above, it may be determined that an abnormal winning in the special winning opening has occurred (see steps S121 to S127).

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29 and 30 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of game balls. The game balls that have won the winning ports 29 and 30 are detected by the winning port switches 29a and 30a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can make a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a probable big hit is made, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is likely to start and win (that is, in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition is easily established. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended as compared with the case where the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the gaming machine as seen from the back side. As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are a variable display control unit including an effect control board 80 on which an effect control microcomputer 100 for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer, and the like. Various boards such as a mounted game control board (main board) 31, an audio output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, and a payout control board 37 mounted with a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control are installed. Yes. The game control board 31 is stored in the board storage case 200.

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power supply substrate 910 and a touch sensor substrate 91 on which power supply circuits for generating various power supply voltages such as DC30V, DC21V, DC12V, and DC5V are mounted. The power supply board 910 is supplied with the game control board 31 and each electrical component control board (the effect control board 80 and the payout control board 37) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and each electrical component (power is supplied) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A power switch as a power supply permission means for executing or shutting off the power supply to the component), and a clear switch for clearing the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 of the game control board 31 are provided. ing. Further, a replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch (inside the substrate).

  In this embodiment, the main board 31 is provided on the game board side, and the payout control board 37 is provided on the game frame side. Even in such a configuration, as will be described later, the communication between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is performed by serial communication, thereby facilitating the routing of the wiring when replacing the game board. .

  Each control board is equipped with control means including a control microcomputer. The control means is an electrical component (game device: ball payout device 97, effect display device 9, light emission from a lamp, LED, etc.) provided in the gaming machine according to a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like. Body, speaker 27, etc.). Hereinafter, the main board 31 may be included in the control board for explanation. In that case, the control means mounted on the control board refers to each of the game control means and the means for controlling the electrical components provided in the gaming machine in accordance with a command signal from the game control means or the like. A substrate on which a microcomputer other than the main substrate 31 is mounted may be referred to as a sub-substrate. The ball payout device 97 is a device for paying out a game ball guided by a passage for guiding the game ball and a sprocket driven by a stepping motor or the like to an upper plate or a lower plate. A payout number counting switch for counting prize balls and rental balls is also configured as part of the unit. In this embodiment, the payout detection means is realized by the payout number count switch 301 and has a function of detecting that a winning ball or a lending ball is actually paid out from the ball payout device 97. In this case, the payout number count switch 301 outputs a detection signal every time one payout of prize balls or rental balls is detected.

  On the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a terminal board 160 having terminals for outputting various information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed above. The terminal board 160 includes, for example, an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state (symbol determination frequency 1 signal shown in FIG. 45, start port signal, jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, hour An information output terminal for externally outputting a short signal, a winning signal, a security signal, a high-accuracy signal, and winning ball information) is provided.

  The game ball stored in the storage tank 38 passes through a guide rail (not shown), and reaches a ball payout device 97 covered with a payout case 40A through a curve rod. Above the ball payout device 97, a ball break switch 187 is provided as a game medium break detection means. When the ball break switch 187 detects a ball break, the payout operation of the ball payout device 97 stops. The ball break switch 187 is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage, but the ball break detection switch 167 for detecting the shortage of supply balls in the storage tank 38 is also an upstream portion of the guide rail (in the storage tank 38). (Proximate part). When the ball break detection switch 167 detects a shortage of game balls, the game balls are replenished to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the replenishment mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  When a large number of game balls as prizes based on winning a prize or a game ball based on a ball lending request are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 is full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball guiding path. Further, when the game ball is paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses the full tank switch as the storage state detection means, and the full tank switch as the storage state detection means is turned on. In this state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the ball hitting device is also stopped.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 3 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The game control microcomputer 560 includes a random number circuit 503. The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads the numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 503 when a start winning to the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a occurs, and starts to change the special symbol and the production symbol. Sometimes it is determined whether or not to make a big hit display result as a specific display result based on the random R, that is, whether or not to make a big hit. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 has a built-in serial communication circuit 505 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals to / from the payout control board 37 (the payout control microcomputer 370) by serial communication. The payout control microcomputer 370 also includes a serial communication circuit for inputting / outputting signals via the serial communication with the game control microcomputer 560 (a serial communication circuit built in the payout control microcomputer 370). (See FIG. 4).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (a special symbol process flag, a value of a reserved memory number counter for counting the number of reserved memories) and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls ( Specifically, a value of a prize ball command output counter (to be described later) is stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for resuming the game based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is output during a period when the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer is output when the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 560 or the like is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). Instead of mounting the power monitoring circuit on the power supply board, it may be mounted on a board that is backed up by a backup power supply (for example, the main board 31). A clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Also, an input driver circuit for supplying the basic circuit 53 with detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the winning confirmation switch 14b, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a and 30a. 58 is also mounted on the main board 31, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening / closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball apparatus according to a command from the basic circuit 53 is also mounted on the main board 31. A system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control microcomputer 560 when the power is turned on, and an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state are sent to the hall via the terminal board 160. An information output circuit 64 for outputting to an external device such as a computer is also mainly used. It is mounted to the plate 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the effect display device 9 that receives and displays the effect symbol variably is performed.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 37 and the ball payout device 97. As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 37 includes a payout control microcomputer 370 including a payout control CPU 371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control microcomputer 370, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control means. That is, the payout control means is realized by a payout control CPU 371, a payout control microcomputer 370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 370. Note that, unlike the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM built in the payout control microcomputer 370 has not been backed up by a backup power source. Therefore, if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the stored contents of the RAM built in the payout control microcomputer 370 are lost.

  The payout control microcomputer 370 performs control to pay out the game ball based on the fact that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The predetermined payout condition is that a game ball has won in a winning area (ordinary winning holes 29, 30, large winning opening, first starting winning opening 13, second starting winning opening 14) provided in the game area. It is established when a rental ball request is made. In addition, for example, when applied to a gaming machine such as a parrot machine or a slot machine, the predetermined payout condition is also satisfied when a game ball or medal return request is made. Further, for example, when applied to a gaming machine such as a parrot machine or a slot machine, the predetermined payout condition is also established when the symbol stop symbol becomes a predetermined winning symbol.

  Detection signals from the ball break switch 187, the full switch 48, and the payout count switch 301 are input to the I / O port 372 f of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 370 and then output to the main board 31 via the I / O port 372a and the output circuit 373B. .

  A detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 295 is input to the I / O port 372e of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The payout motor position sensor 295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. . In the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37, the detection signal from the ball break switch 187 indicates that the ball is out of ball, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates that the ball is full. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full state, the payout control microcomputer 370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 90 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launcher. A full tank signal is output. A launch motor signal output from the AND circuit 91 of the launch board 90 to the launch motor 94 is transmitted from the launch board 90 to the launch motor 94. A full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 91 mounted on the launch board 90, and a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 92 (for driving the launch motor 94). Is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 91. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 91 is input to the firing motor 94. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 94 is stopped. Even when the payout control microcomputer 370 is outputting a full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 94 is not stopped, and the ball launch from the hitting ball launcher is not stopped. May be.

  The payout control microcomputer 370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 560 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 via serial communication circuits 505 and 380. In order to confirm, payout control commands (connection confirmation command, connection OK command) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a connection confirmation command for performing connection confirmation at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 505, and the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the game control microcomputer 560 from the game control microcomputer 560. When the connection confirmation command is received, a connection OK command notifying that is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560. Also, for example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 560 sets data indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command, and the number of winning balls set in the setting. The command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball number reception command indicating that the prize ball number has been received to the game control microcomputer 560. Furthermore, when the payout control microcomputer 370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, it transmits a prize ball end command indicating the completion of the prize ball to the game control microcomputer 560. The payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball preparing command to the game control microcomputer 560 at regular intervals until the prize ball payout operation is completed. In addition, when a predetermined error (an error such as ball lending, full tank, or out of ball) has occurred, the lower 4 bits of the connection OK command or the winning ball preparation command should be made different from the data indicating the error content. The connection OK command and the winning ball preparation command in which the setting is made are transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 372c. A detection signal from an error release switch 375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 372f of the payout control board 37. The error cancel switch 375 is used to cancel the error state by software reset.

  Further, a drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the payout motor 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 97 via the output port 372a and the relay board 72. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 372a, but is not shown in FIG.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 50 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 50 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 60, a ball lending LED 61, a ball lending switch 62, and a return switch 63 provided in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray 3 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 66.

  A card lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 62 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 63 has been operated are provided to the card unit 50 from the interface board 66 in accordance with the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending display signal are given from the card unit 50 to the interface board 66. Between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 372f and the output port 372d. An interface board 66 is interposed between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 as shown in FIG.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 50. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 50 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 50, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 37. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 37.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 50 and, when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 50, drives the payout motor 289 to give a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 370 causes the EXS signal to the card unit 50 to fall. Thereafter, when a BRDY signal from the card unit 50 is not in an ON state, a prize ball payout control is executed when a payout command signal is received from the game control means.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 50 is supplied from the payout control board 37. That is, power supply from the power supply board 910 to the card unit 50 is performed via the payout control board 37 and the interface board 66. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 50 is provided in a 24 V AC power supply line for the card unit 50 arranged in the interface board 66, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 50. It is prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the card unit 50 is installed adjacent to the gaming machine as a separate body from the gaming machine is taken as an example, but the card unit 50 may be integrated with the gaming machine. . Further, the present invention can be applied even in the case where game balls corresponding to the amount of money are lent out in accordance with coin insertion.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, an electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of output port assignment in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 6, a payout control signal (in this example, a connection signal) transmitted to the payout control board 37 is output from the output port 0. Further, a solenoid (large winning port door solenoid) 21 for opening and closing a variable winning ball device 20 for opening and closing the big winning port, and a solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid) 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 are driven. The signal is also output from output port 0. In addition, a high-accuracy medium signal among signals output from the output port 0 to an external device (for example, a hall computer) via the terminal board 160 is also output.

  Note that the logic (for example, 0 is on) opposite to the “logic” (for example, 1 is on) shown in FIG. 6 may be used. In particular, for the connection signal, the main board 31 and the payout control board. The “logic” is determined so that the payout control microcomputer 370 always detects the off state when the signal line to the terminal 37 is disconnected or when the cable is disconnected (including no cable connection). . Specifically, generally, when disconnection or cable disconnection occurs, a high level is detected on the signal receiving side, so the high level on the signal line between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is the game control means. The “logic” is determined to be in the off state at the output port at. Therefore, if necessary, an output buffer circuit for logically inverting the signal is provided outside the output port on the main board 31.

  From the output port 1 to the external device (for example, hall computer) via the terminal board 160, various information output signals, that is, information related to the control (for example, symbol determination frequency 1 signal, start port signal, jackpot 1 signal, 2 jackpots, 3 jackpots, time-short signal, winning signal, security signal) are output. However, as already described, the high-accuracy intermediate signal among the signals output externally is output from the output port 0. In this embodiment, prize ball information (a signal outputted every time ten prize ball payouts are detected) is also outputted to an external device via the terminal board 160. In this case, on the payout control board 37 side, a prize ball payout is detected, and prize ball information is input to the main board 31. The prize ball information input to the main board 31 is output to the outside via the terminal board 160 via the main board 31 as it is without passing through the game control microcomputer 560. The prize ball information input to the main board 31 may be output to the outside via the terminal board 160 after temporarily passing through the game control microcomputer 560.

  Note that signals output to the outside via the terminal board 160 are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. For example, a door opening signal indicating that the gaming frame is in an open state, a prize ball signal 1 (a signal output every time one prize ball payout is detected), a gaming machine error status signal (a gaming machine has an error) The state (in this example, a signal indicating that the ball is out of error state or full tank error state) may also be output to the external device via the terminal board 160. In this case, on the payout control board 37 side, it is also detected that the gaming frame is in an open state, a prize ball payout, and an error state of the gaming machine, and the door opening signal, the prize ball signal 1, and the gaming machine error status signal are the main board. 31. The door opening signal, the prize ball signal 1, and the gaming machine error state signal input to the main board 31 are not transmitted through the game control microcomputer 560 but directly passed through the main board 31 to the terminal board 160. Output externally. Also in this case, the door opening signal, the prize ball signal 1 and the gaming machine error state signal input to the main board 31 pass through the gaming control microcomputer 560 once and then externally output via the terminal board 160. You may be made to do.

  Further, for example, in addition to the symbol determination frequency 1 signal as a symbol determination frequency signal for notifying the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the symbol determination frequency 2 signal may be externally output via the terminal board 160. In this case, for example, in order to notify the number of fluctuations of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol by externally outputting the symbol determination number 2 signal as a signal for notifying only the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol. The signal may be configured to be externally output as a signal of the number of symbol determinations. With such a configuration, on the external device side such as a hall computer, in addition to the number of fluctuations of only the first special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or the fluctuation of only the second special symbol The number of times can also be grasped.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 7, the detection signal of the count switch 23, the detection signals of the winning opening switches 29a and 30a, and the detection signal of the winning confirmation switch 14b are input to bits 0 and 2 to 4 of the input port 0, respectively. . In addition, a radio wave sensor signal, a magnet sensor signal, a door opening signal, and prize ball information are input to the bits 4 to 7 of the input port 1, respectively. In addition, bits 0 to 4 of the input port 2 respectively include a detection signal of the first start port switch 13a, a detection signal of the second start port switch 14a, a detection signal of the gate switch 32a, and a clear switch from the power supply board 910. A detection signal and a power-off signal are input.

  FIG. 8 is a circuit diagram showing an internal configuration of the terminal board 160. In the terminal board 160 shown in FIG. 8, the connectors CN-1 and CN-2 on the upper left side are connectors for connecting cables that transmit signals from the main board 31, and the connector CN-3 on the lower left side is This is a connector for connecting a cable for transmitting a signal from the payout control board 37 via the main board 31. The right connectors CN1 to CN10 are connectors for connecting cables that transmit signals to an external device such as a hall computer. The terminal board 160 is mounted with semiconductor relays (PhotoMOS relays) PC1 to PC10 as driver circuits.

  When the cable from the main board 31 is connected to the connectors CN-1 and CN-2, various signals are input from the main board 31 (game control microcomputer 560) to the terminal board 160. Specifically, the symbol determination number 1 signal is input to the terminal “2” of the connector CN-1, the start port signal is input to the terminal “3” of the connector CN-1, and the terminal “4” of the connector CN-1 is input. 1 signal is input to the terminal “5” of the connector CN-1, 2 signals are input to the terminal “6” of the connector CN-1, and 3 signals of the jackpot are input to the terminal “7” of the connector CN-1. To the terminal “8” of the connector CN-1, a winning signal is input to the terminal “9” of the connector CN-1, and a terminal “9” of the connector CN-2 is input. A high-accuracy signal is input.

  Further, when the cable from the payout control board 37 is connected to the connector CN-3 via the main board 31, a signal from the payout control board 37 (the payout control microcomputer 370) is input to the terminal board 160. The Specifically, the prize ball information is input to the terminal “9” of the connector CN-3.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the terminal board 160, the signal line of the reference potential is connected to the terminal “1” of the connector CN-1, the connector CN-2, and the connector CN-3, the signal lines are branched, Are connected to the input terminal “1” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10. The signal lines connected to the terminals “2” to “9” of the connector CN-1, the connector “9” of the connector CN-2, and the connector “9” of the connector CN-3 are each 1KΩ resistance R1. Are connected to the input terminal “2” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 via R10. The signal lines connected to the output terminals “4” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 are connected to the terminals “1” of the connectors CN1 to CN10, respectively. The signal lines connected to the output terminals “3” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 are connected to the terminals “2” of the connectors CN1 to CN10, respectively.

  In the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10, when a signal current flows through the input terminal, the light emitting element (LED) on the input side emits light. The emitted light is applied to the photoelectric element (solar cell) provided opposite to the LED through the transparent silicon. The photoelectric element that has received the light is exchanged for voltage according to the amount of light, and this voltage passes through the control circuit to charge the MOSFET gate of the output section. When the MOSFET gate voltage supplied from the photoelectric element reaches the set voltage value, the MOSFET becomes conductive and turns on the load. When the signal current at the input terminal is cut off, the light emitting element (LED) stops emitting light. When the light emission of the LED stops, the voltage of the photoelectric element decreases, and when the voltage supplied from the photoelectric element decreases, the gate load of the MOSFET is rapidly discharged by the control circuit. With this control circuit, the MOSFET is turned off and the load is turned off.

  By the operation of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 as described above, signals input from the input side connector CN-1, connector CN-2, and connector CN-3 are transmitted to the output side connectors CN1 to CN10, and a hall computer or the like. Output to an external device. Specifically, the design CN count 1 signal is output from the connector CN1, the start signal is output from the connector CN2, the jackpot signal is output from the connector CN3, the jackpot signal is output from the connector CN4, and the connector CN5 is output. Three jackpot signals are output, a time signal is output from the connector CN6, a winning signal is output from the connector CN7, a security signal is output from the connector CN8, a high-probability medium signal is output from the connector CN9, and a prize is output from the connector CN10. Sphere information is output. The assignment of connectors to each external output signal on terminal board 160 is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the security signal may be output from the end connector (for example, connector CN10) provided on the terminal board 160.

  Note that the winning signal output from the connector CN7 indicates that a predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 balls) of winning balls is satisfied (the first start winning port 13, This is a signal indicating that a winning has occurred in the second start winning port 14, the big winning port, and the normal winning ports 29, 30. The award ball has not been paid out. By confirming the winning signal, it is possible to recognize the expected number of prize balls to be paid out by an external device such as a hall computer.

  Also, the prize ball information output from the connector CN10 is that a specific number (10 balls in this embodiment) of prize balls has been paid out (the ball payout device 97 is driven and the prize balls are actually paid out). This is a signal indicating that By confirming the prize ball information, the number of prize balls actually paid out can be recognized by an external device such as a hall computer. Also, by confirming the planned number of prize balls indicated by the winning signal and the number of prize balls already paid out indicated by the prize ball information, whether or not the prize balls have been paid out normally and the number of excess or insufficient prize balls are determined. It can be recognized by an external device such as a hall computer.

  The security signal output from the connector CN8 is a signal indicating the security state of the gaming machine. Specifically, as will be described later, when it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred based on the detection result of the second starting opening switch 14a and the detection result of the winning confirmation switch 14b. In addition, a security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 4 minutes). With such a configuration, a fraudulent act such as recognizing that the number of winnings to the second start winning opening 14 is larger than the actual winning number using radio waves or the like has been performed. Can be recognized on the external device side.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming machine is turned on and the initialization process is executed, the security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). . By configuring as such, it is recognized that the initialization process has been executed at an unnatural timing (for example, even after all the gaming machine power reset operations have been completed when the amusement store is opened). By making it possible, the external device such as a hall computer can recognize the possibility that an unauthorized act of illegally resetting the power of the gaming machine and aiming for a big hit at the power reset timing is performed. it can.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the abnormal winning is detected and the initialization process (for example, the operation of the clear switch is performed when the power to the gaming machine is turned on) A common security signal is output from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160 to the outside when the processing such as clearing the stored content is executed. This is because the initialization process is usually performed only when the game machine power is reset when the amusement store is opened, so the terminal is used for a signal that is output only once a day. Providing a dedicated connector or semiconductor relay on the substrate 160 is not efficient and wasteful. Therefore, in this embodiment, an external output signal is configured by outputting a security signal from the common connector CN8 when an abnormal winning is detected and when an initialization process is executed. The waste of lines and circuit elements is reduced. That is, it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of parts of a mechanism for outputting information to an external device such as a hall computer and complication of wiring work.

  The signal output from the common connector as a security signal is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, not only abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14, but abnormal winning at the first starting winning opening 13, the large winning opening, and the normal winning openings 29, 30 is detected, and a common connector of the terminal board 160 is detected. You may comprise so that external output is possible as a security signal from CN8. In this case, for example, the first start winning opening 13, the big winning opening, and the normal winning openings 29 and 30 are also used as a switch for detecting the winning of the game ball, similarly to the second starting winning opening 14. Two different types of switches (proximity switch and photo sensor) may be provided, and the presence / absence of an abnormal prize may be determined according to the same determination method as that for the second start winning opening 14.

  Further, for example, when abnormal magnetism is detected by a magnet sensor provided in a gaming machine or when abnormal radio waves are detected by a radio wave sensor provided in a gaming machine, a security signal is output from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. You may comprise so that external output is possible. In addition, for example, when an abnormality of various switches provided in the gaming machine is detected (for example, when occurrence of a short circuit is detected by determining that the input value has exceeded the threshold value), a common terminal board 160 is used. The connector CN8 may be configured so that it can be externally output as a security signal.

  As described above, even if there is an abnormal winning at the grand prize opening, an abnormal magnetic error, or an abnormal radio wave error, it is possible to output only one signal line as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. If connected, an error detection can be performed by an external device such as a hall computer, and the work load related to error detection can be reduced.

  In the case of detecting an abnormal winning at the big winning opening, when determining based on the number of detections by the count switch 23 and the number of detections by the winning confirmation switch being a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. In addition, the count switch 23 when the value of the special symbol process flag is not a value indicating that the game is a big hit game (for example, when the value of the special symbol process flag is not 5 or more, see FIG. 28). Even when a game ball is detected by the above, it may be determined that an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred. In addition, in this way, when it is determined that an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred based on the detection result of the count switch 23 and the winning confirmation switch, or an abnormal to the big winning opening based on the value of the special symbol process flag. Even when it is determined that a winning has occurred, the security signal is externally output by setting a predetermined time (for example, 4 minutes) in the security signal information timer, as in step S128 in the switch normality / abnormality check process. You can do it.

  Further, for example, even when a communication error between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is detected, it can be externally output as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. May be. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that a communication error has occurred based on failure to receive a connection OK command or a prize ball number reception command (to be described later) from the payout control microcomputer 370, and the terminal The security signal may be externally output from the common connector CN8 of the board 160. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that a communication error has occurred based on the value of any error bit in the status register (not shown) of the serial communication circuit 505 being set, The security signal may be externally output from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160.

  In addition to the signal line and connector CN8 for security signals, a signal line and connector dedicated to communication errors between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 may be provided on the terminal board 160. When a communication error between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is detected, an external device such as a hall computer is transmitted via the terminal board 160 as a signal different from the security signal. May be output.

  In addition to the signal line for security signal output, detection of initialization processing, detection of abnormal winning at the first start winning opening 13, detection of abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14, and big winning opening A separate signal line is provided for detection of abnormal prize winning, detection of abnormal magnetic error, detection of abnormal radio wave error, and detection of communication error. From the terminal board 160, corresponding to each error together with the security signal. An external output signal may also be output to an external device such as a hall computer. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an error has occurred by checking the security signal, and further, by checking the signal output for each type of error, the type of error can be determined on the amusement store side. Can be confirmed. Therefore, when an amusement store requires a confirmation of the type of error, an external output signal for each error type is provided separately from the security signal, so that an external output that better meets the needs of the amusement store can be provided. Can be done. On the other hand, in the case of a game shop that only requests confirmation that some kind of error has occurred, only the security signal out of the externally output signals is connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Check it.

  As described above, by providing the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 on the terminal board 160, signal input from the outside to the inside of the gaming machine can be prevented, and as a result, illegal acts can be reliably prevented. In the above example, the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 are provided on the terminal board 160. However, other relay elements such as a mechanical relay may be used instead of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the CPU 56 starts outputting a connection signal to the payout control microcomputer 370 (step S4). When the CPU 56 starts outputting the connection signal in step S4, the CPU 56 sends a connection signal to the payout control microcomputer 370 unless the power supply of the gaming machine is stopped or the output becomes impossible due to some communication error. Output continuously.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S5). By the processing in step S5, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the RAM 55 in an accessible state (step S6), and proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  Note that a software delay process for delaying the start timing of the game device control process (game control process) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, the state of the clear signal may be reconfirmed again after a predetermined delay time. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above process is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped is stopped. Run.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a hot start process for resuming the game using the data stored in the RAM 55 that has been backed up (step S91). Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S92), and proceeds to step S15. In addition, after setting in step S92, a backup command is transmitted after serial communication circuit setting processing in step S15a described later is performed.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, a ball-out flag, and the like are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in a flag for performing the above. An initial value (clear data) is also set in each timer (start port information storage timer, winning information storage timer, security signal information timer, etc.) used to output each external output signal described later.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used. After setting in step S13, an initialization command is transmitted after serial communication circuit setting processing in step S15a described later is performed.

  The CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) in the security signal information timer (step S14a). The security signal information timer is a timer for measuring the ON time of the security signal output from the terminal board 160. In this embodiment, an initialization process is performed when the gaming machine is turned on by executing an information output process (see S31) described later based on the fact that a predetermined time is set in the security signal information timer in step S14a. Is executed, a security signal is externally output for a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (step S15). In this case, the CPU 56 performs settings according to the random number circuit setting program stored in the ROM 54 in advance, so that the random number circuit 503 updates the random R value.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initial setting of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S15a). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 54 in the serial communication circuit 505 in accordance with the serial communication circuit setting program, so that the serial communication circuit 505 performs serial communication with the payout control microcomputer. I do.

  When the serial communication circuit 505 is initialized, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 (step S15b). In this case, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of interrupt processing by executing processing according to the interrupt priority setting program 557.

  For example, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of each interrupt process according to a predetermined interrupt process priority table including the default priority of each interrupt process. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 performs initialization according to the interrupt processing priority table so as to preferentially execute an interrupt process whose cause is the occurrence of a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 sets an interrupt priority execution flag at the time of communication error indicating that priority is given to an interrupt process whose cause is an interrupt.

  In this embodiment, when a timer interrupt and an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 are generated at the same time, the CPU 56 preferentially performs an interrupt process by the timer interrupt.

  In addition, the default priority of each interrupt process can be changed by the user. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores specification information for specifying an interrupt process set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 in advance. Then, the CPU 56 sets the priority of interrupt processing according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54.

  In addition to steps S15 to S15b, a part of the setting process of the random number circuit 503 and the serial communication circuit 505 is also executed in the process of step S5. For example, in step S5, an initial value is set in the baud rate register, communication setting register, interrupt control register, and status register of the serial communication circuit 505 as the built-in device register.

  In the initialization process of the main process, a process of setting “250” as an initial value to a prize ball number counter used for detecting a prize ball shortage error or a prize ball excess error, which will be described later, is also executed. Note that the process of setting the initial value in the prize ball number counter may be executed, for example, in the hot start process of step S91 or the process of sequentially setting each initial value in the work area of step S12. It suffices if it is executed before the process is shifted.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) ( Step S16). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 first disables the interrupt (step S17), executes the initial value random number update process (step S18a) and the display random number update process (step S18b), The interrupt is permitted again (step S19). That is, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt disabled state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, and interrupts enable state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are finished. To.

  The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot symbol determining random number for determining a special symbol for generating a jackpot or whether to shift the gaming state to a probable state) Initial value of the count value such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a probability variation determining random number for generating, a normal random number for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process described later (a process in which a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as an effect display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15, a ball payout device 97 provided in the gaming machine, or When the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round in a process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a gaming apparatus control process), an initial value is set in the counter.

  The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. In this embodiment, as a display random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, or a random number for determining a reach for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated, is used. Used. The display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  In addition, when the display random number update process is executed, the interrupt disabled state is executed by the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process also in the timer interrupt process described later (that is, the timer This is because the same process is executed in steps S26 and S27 of the interrupt process), so as to avoid conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process. That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S18a and S18b and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of values may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the processing of steps S18a and S18b.

  When the interrupt-permitted state is set in step S19, the timer interrupt or interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is permitted until the next processing in step S17 is executed and the interrupt-prohibited state is set. . When a timer interrupt occurs while the interrupt permission state is set, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a timer interrupt process to be described later. When an interrupt request is generated from the serial communication circuit 505 while the interrupt permission state is set, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 causes each interrupt process (communication error interrupt process, reception time interrupt, Load processing, transmission completion interrupt processing). In this embodiment, priority is given to the interrupt process before the timer interrupt or the interrupt request is set to be permitted by executing step S15b before the loop process from step S17 to step S19. Processing for setting or changing the order is performed.

  Next, the hot start process in step S91 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hot start process. In the hot start process, the CPU 56 first sets the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S9101), and sequentially stores the contents of the backup setting table in the work area (area in the RAM 55). Setting is performed (step S9102). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. Initialization data (for example, a prize ball process code, a prize ball process timer, a frame status display buffer, and a previous frame status display buffer) for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set in the backup setting table. Yes. As a result of the processing in steps S9101 and S9102, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  The CPU 56 also outputs a high-probability output permission flag for permitting external output via the terminal board 160 of a high-probability signal indicating that the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state (probability change state). Is set (step S9103). Instead of unconditionally setting the high-accuracy medium output permission flag, it is first checked whether or not it is in a high-probability state (probability variation state) (specifically, the probability variation flag stored in the backup RAM). It is also possible to set the high-accuracy output permission flag on the condition that it is in a high-probability state (probability variation state). As such, at the start of power supply, the high-accuracy output permission flag may be set unconditionally, or the high-accuracy output flag may be set on the condition that it is in a high probability state (probability variation state). .

  In addition, the CPU 56 clears a prize information storage timer for measuring a prize signal output time, which will be described later (step S9104). In other words, in this embodiment, the value of the winning information storage timer is stored in the power-backed RAM 55 and is maintained for a predetermined time even when the power supply is stopped, but the process of step S9104 is executed. Cleared when power is restored. As described above, in this embodiment, in the common hot start process, the setting process of the high-accuracy output permission flag and the clearing process of the winning information storage timer can be executed, and the process routine is shared. The control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 is reduced.

  For example, in the backup setting table, a value for setting the high-accuracy output permission flag (for example, logical value “1”) or a value for clearing the winning information storage timer (for example, clear data “ 0 ") may also be set and step S9102 may be executed to turn on the high-accuracy output permission flag and clear the winning information storage timer. In this case, for example, based on the backup time setting table, the value of the high-accuracy medium output permission flag in the work area is set to the on state (for example, a logical value “1” is written), or a prize is awarded in the work area. Clear data may be written to the value of the information storage timer. By doing so, it is possible to use a single data table (setting table at the time of backup) to share the setting processing of the high-accuracy output permission flag and the clearing processing of the winning information storage timer, and the game control micro The control burden on the computer 560 can be further reduced.

  Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, in a period during which interruption is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A timer interrupt process that is activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt is executed. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-on signal is turned on) (step S20). Then, the CPU 56 detects switches such as the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the winning confirmation switch 14b, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a and 30a through the switch circuit 58. A signal is input and the input of each switch is detected (switch processing: step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S36 and S37. Execute control to

  Next, the CPU 56 executes magnet sensor error notification processing for performing magnet sensor error notification based on the detection signal input from the magnet sensor (step S24).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating a random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control (determination random number update process: step S25). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S26). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S27).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S28). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S29). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting an effect control command related to the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol in the transmission data register of the serial communication circuit 505 and sending the effect control command (effect symbol command control process: step S30). . It should be noted that the fact that the variation of the effect symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 outputs, for example, data such as a symbol determination number 1 signal, a start opening signal, a jackpot signal 1-3, a time reduction signal, a winning signal, a security signal, and a high accuracy signal supplied to the hall management computer. Information output processing is performed (step S31).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for transmitting / receiving (input / output) signals to / from the payout control microcomputer 370 via the serial communication circuit 505, and when a winning occurs, detection of the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, etc. Prize ball processing is performed for setting the number of prize balls based on the signal (step S32). In this embodiment, data indicating the number of winning balls is obtained by changing the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command in response to detection of winning based on the winning opening switch 29a, 30a being turned on. The set prize ball number command is output to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the serial communication circuit 505. The payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to receiving a prize ball number command in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set.

  In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S33). In the test terminal processing, when a sudden probability change big hit or sudden appearance big hit described later occurs, three big hit signals are output at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 57, which will be described later, in the big hit gaming state based on sudden probability change big hit or sudden hitting big hit, the big hit 3 signal is output when the opening control of the round 1 big winning opening in the big hit gaming state is started. First, output starts when a long open period in the jackpot gaming state based on the sudden appearance apparent jackpot comes, but in the test terminal processing, even if it is a big hit gaming state based on the sudden probability variation jackpot or the sudden appearance bonus jackpot, It may be configured so that it is output when the opening control of the round 1 big prize opening is started. Further, in this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. Is output to the output port (step S34: output processing). And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in a pending | holding memory | storage number (step S35).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S36). Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S37).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S38). In this case, when the gaming state is the short time state, the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp indicating the short time state is set in the output buffer. When the gaming state is also controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state), state display control data for displaying a state indicator lamp indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. You may do it.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a frame state output process for transmitting a frame state display command in which information indicating the error state of the gaming machine is set to the effect control microcomputer 100 in order to display the error state of the gaming machine. Execute (Step S39).

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S40), and the process ends.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are shown as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12, about the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 which is used when not reaching and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 12, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used in the case of sudden appearance big hit, sudden probability change big hit or small hit. is there. Also, as shown in FIG. 12, among the fluctuation patterns that are used when there is no sudden appearance big hit, sudden probability change big hit, and small hit, and when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by pseudo-rendition, the re-change is once. Done. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-3 used in the case of sudden appearance big hit, sudden probability change big hit or small hit and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream is re-changed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

In this embodiment, the following random numbers (1) to (5) are used. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (15R probability variable big hit, 15R normal big hit, sudden appearance big hit, sudden probability variable big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of 15R big hit, it includes a normal CA3-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-ream. It is classified into a normal CA 3-2 that is a variation pattern type and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type with super reach. Further, in the case of a sudden appearance big hit or sudden probability change big hit, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern, and a special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach It is classified by type. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with one normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S25 in the game control process shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 13 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 13 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 13A is a jackpot determination value.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted to a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is increased, and is also changed to a high base state. There are two cases: a state that is only transferred to a state and a state that is not transferred to a high base state (which is a low base state). Is a jackpot determination table for probability variation, and a normal jackpot determination table is used in other cases. As will be described later, in this embodiment, when a big hit is reached, the game is shifted to a high base state after the big hit game ends (the game state before the big hit is not a high probability state and is a low base state, Except after the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit, that is, in this example, the game state before the big hit is not a high probability state and the low base state, and after the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit, Not transferred to the high base state). However, the high base state is finished when the variable display is finished 100 times after the big hit game is finished, and is shifted to the low base state. Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, when a 15R probability variation big hit, a sudden appearance big hit, or a sudden probability change big hit, the state is shifted to a high probability state until the next big hit after the big hit game ends. Therefore, if the 15R probability change big hit, sudden appearance big hit or sudden probability change big hit is reached, when the variable display is finished 100 times after the big hit game ends, only the high probability state is transferred and the high base state is not transferred (low There is a case where it is in a probable state. In the following, the 15R probability variable big hit, the sudden appearance big hit, and the sudden probability variable big hit, which are big hits that are shifted to the high probability state after the big hit game are ended, are collectively referred to as the probability variable big hits, and are the big hits that are not shifted to the high probability state after the big hit game ends. The 15R normal big hit may be called the normal big hit.

  13B and 13C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 13B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 13B and 13C are the small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state, On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be big hit (15R probability variable big hit, 15R normal big hit, sudden appearance big hit, sudden probability variable big hit). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 13A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the “probability” shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C indicates the probability (ratio) of making a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, a case where a small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 13D and 13E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 13 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Further, FIG. 13E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, This table is referred to in order to determine any one of “15R normal big hit”, “abrupt probable big hit” and “suddenly probable big hit” In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13D and 13E, eight determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In the jackpot type determination table 131b, two judgment values are assigned to “sudden probability variation jackpot” (a ratio of 2/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie. It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  14A to 14C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random value (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 14A used when the big hit type is “15R normal big hit” and the big hit type shown in FIG. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  As shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, in this embodiment, when “15R probability variation big hit” or “15R normal big hit”, a random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) If the value of 150 is 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In that case, in both of the 15R normal big hit big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the 15R probability big hit big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super reach and the variation pattern type with pseudo-ream and the super reach In addition, a variation pattern type that does not involve pseudo-continuations is assigned.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “abrupt probable big hit” or “suddenly promising big hit”, for example, the big hit types such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 are “adjacent predicate”. When it is other than “big hit” and “suddenly promising big hit”, a judgment value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no judgment value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “abrupt probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit”, when the control is suddenly probable big hit, the big hit by 15R positive variable big hit or 15R normal big hit The variation pattern type can be determined differently from the case of controlling to the state.

  FIG. 14D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 15A to 15C are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Among these, FIG. 15 (A) shows the variation pattern type determination table 135A for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3. FIG. 15B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 15C shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135C used when the gaming state is the high base state. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a loss symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  Note that the example shown in FIG. 15 shows a case where separate outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135B and 135C are used for the case where the gaming state is a high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. However, the common deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used in the case of the high base state and in the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15C, a case is shown in which the common high base deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storage, but the high base deviation variation pattern is used. As the type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for deviation corresponding to the total number of pending storages (tables with different ratios of determination values) may be used. Further, in a high probability state, a table having a different determination value ratio from the variation pattern type determination table 135C for detachment may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined and out of place) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 (A) and 15 (B), in this embodiment, when the game state is normal and the game state is normal, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of pending storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B) are assigned. The “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, for example, as shown in this embodiment, a variable display result without a reach, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect, and the like. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) that is used when the big hit is not a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the case where a common jackpot variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. However, is the current gaming state a probability variation state? Depending on whether it is a normal state, you may make it use the variation pattern type determination table for big hits prepared separately, respectively. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 15B is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), When the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss, and the gaming state is a high base state, the case of 1 or 2 having a smaller total number of pending storage However (or, for example, even when the number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is smaller 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. There may be cases where there are cases.

  FIGS. 16A and 16B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 16A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and variation pattern types including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are used. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 16B, as the variation pattern types, the special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and the special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 16B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2, a special effect PG 1-2, and a special effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  18 and 19 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable symbol display. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 12, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H).

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001, A002, and A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start 2 designation command, or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, if “15R normal big hit”, the big hit start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and if “15R probability variable big hit”, the big hit start 2 designation command (A002 (H)) ) Is used, and when it is “abrupt probable big hit”, “sudden probability change big hit” or “small hit”, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (A003 (H)) is used. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a fanfare designation command for sudden probability change big hit start designation in the case of sudden appearance big hit or sudden probability change big hit, but does not send a fanfare designation command in case of small hit. You may comprise. Further, in the case of “surprise appearance big hit”, a big hit start 2 designation command (A002 (H)) may be transmitted.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The commands A301 and A302 (H) display a jackpot end screen, that is, an effect control command for specifying the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command, a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command) ). The big hit end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “15R normal big hit” is ended. The big hit end 2 designation command (A302 (H)) is used to end the big hit game by the “15R probability change big hit” or the “surprise masquerade big hit”. Command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of sudden probable big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of small hit. Also good. Also, in the case of “surprise masquerade jackpot”, a jackpot end 3 designation command (A303 (H)) may be transmitted.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command: time-short state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command: probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state. Command B003 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / high base state background designation command: low probability high base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a low probability / high base state. .

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which an effect control command indicating that the number of reserved memories is increased or decreased is transmitted for each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. You may make it transmit the production control command which designates itself. In this case, for example, an effect control command for designating which one of the first start prize opening 13 and the second start prize opening 14 has been won is transmitted, and the reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is designated as the first. You may make it transmit a common production | presentation control command by 1 reserved memory number and 2nd reserved memory number. In other words, a combined reserved storage number designation command is transmitted that indicates a value obtained by adding together the reserved memory number based on the start winning at the first start winning port 13 and the reserved memory number based on the starting winning at the second start winning port 14. To do. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control that has received the total pending memory number designation command receives the first pending memory number addition designation command and the second pending memory number addition designation command even though it has received the total pending memory number designation command. If not, the display device 9 is configured to display the reserved memory number in a manner different from that when the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command is received. According to such a configuration, even if the production control CPU 101 does not receive the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command due to a communication failure, The person can be notified.

  Further, for example, separate presentation control commands (holding memory number designation commands) may be transmitted when the first holding memory number is designated and when the second holding memory number is designated. In this case, for example, as a reserved memory number designation command, a value that can specify the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number as MODE data (for example, “C0 (H) when designating the first reserved memory number) ”And“ C1 (H) ”in the case of designating the second reserved memory number), an effect control command in which the value of the reserved memory number is set as EXT data may be transmitted.

  Also, for example, if the same first reserved memory number is specified, an effect control command specifying the addition or subtraction of the first reserved memory number is transmitted by making the MODE data common and different EXT data. You may do it. For example, when the common MODE data “C0 (H)” is used and the subtraction of the first reserved memory number is designated, the command C000 (H) is transmitted, and the addition of the first reserved memory number is designated. The command C001 (H) may be transmitted. Further, when specifying the second reserved memory number, the MODE data is made different, and when specifying the subtraction of the second reserved memory number, the command C100 (H) is transmitted, and the second reserved memory number is determined. When adding is designated, the command C101 (H) may be transmitted.

  The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Specifically, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. ).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 30), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, a small hit, Determine. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit or the small hit or a value for designating the type of the big win is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” occurs in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 1 designation command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. When it is determined that “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. When it is determined that the “15R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. When it is determined that the “surprise appearance big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. When it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. When it is determined that “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command) in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designation command and when setting a display result designation command.

  Next, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the big hit and the small hit for each big hit type will be described. 20-21 is explanatory drawing which shows the opening pattern of a special winning opening.

  First, with reference to FIG. 20 (1), a description will be given of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the sudden probability change big hit and the small hit. In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the big hit game state based on the sudden probability change big hit, after the big prize opening is controlled to be open for 0.052 seconds, the big prize opening is controlled to be closed for 2 seconds. Then, by repeating such an opening mode 15 times, as shown in FIG. 20 (1), the operation of controlling the special winning opening to the closed state for 2 seconds after controlling the open state for 0.052 seconds is performed. Repeated continuously.

  Further, in this embodiment, when controlled to the small hit game state, during the small hit game, the operation of controlling the big winning opening to the open state for 0.052 seconds and then controlling to the closed state for 2 seconds is 15. Repeated continuously. Therefore, in the case of sudden probability change big hit and small hit, as shown in FIG. 20 (1), the high-speed opening control of the big prize opening is performed in the same manner in appearance, and whether the sudden probability change big hit is small hit. It is difficult to recognize whether it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20 (2), explanation will be given on the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the 15R normal big hit and 15R probability big hit. In this embodiment, when controlled to the big hit gaming state based on 15R normal big hit or 15R probability variable big hit, after the big winning opening is controlled to open for 29.5 seconds per round, the big winning opening is closed for two seconds. (However, 2 seconds when the special winning opening is closed is an interval period). And, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), the round of the opening mode is repeated 15 times, and then, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), the winning opening is controlled to be open for 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. Is repeated 15 times in succession. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 15R normal big hit or the 15R probability variable big hit, the opening time of the big winning opening is as long as 29.5 seconds, and the opening operation that can sufficiently expect the winning of the game ball is continuously performed 15 times. The number of rounds apparently matches the number of rounds on internal control.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21 (3), a description will be given of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the stubborn appearance big hit. In this embodiment, in the case of being controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the probability variation big hit D, first, in Round 1, the operation for controlling the big winning opening to the open state for 0.052 seconds and then to the closed state for 2 seconds is performed. Repeatedly, the big prize opening is controlled to open at high speed. According to such an operation mode, as shown in FIG. 21 (3), in round 1, the big prize opening is controlled to be opened at high speed 15 times, and the open control is performed in the same manner as that of the sudden probability variation big hit. In addition, after the opening of the 15th big prize opening in round 1 is finished, the big prize opening is controlled to be closed for 9 seconds, and the introduction effect is executed in that 9 seconds. Further, in Round 1, after the grand prize opening is controlled to be open for 25 seconds, the big prize opening is controlled to be closed for 2 seconds (however, 2 seconds when the big prize opening is closed is an interval period). ). That is, the control is performed as if the kite suddenly evolved from a promising big hit to a big hit with a long opening time (a game ball can be expected to win). In this embodiment, during the period in which the high-speed release control is performed during the sudden appearance big hit, the same effect as that during the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit is executed.

  In round 2 to round 15, after the grand prize opening is controlled to be opened for 29.5 seconds per round, the big prize opening is controlled to be closed for 2 seconds (however, the big prize opening is set to the closed state 2). Second is the interval period). And, as shown in FIG. 21 (3), the round of the opening mode is repeated 15 times, and then, as shown in FIG. 21 (3), the winning opening is controlled to be open for 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. Is repeated 15 times in succession. For this reason, in this embodiment, in the case of a sudden masquerade jackpot, the same high-speed release control is performed at the beginning of Round 1 as during a big hit game based on sudden probability change big hit or a small hit game based on small hit. After the elapse of the period during which the high speed opening control is performed, it is controlled to be open for 25 seconds in round 1, and thereafter, in rounds 2 to 15, the opening time of the big prize opening is the same as in 15R normal big hit and 15R probability variable big hit. The release operation, in which the winning of the game ball can be sufficiently expected for 29.5 seconds, is continuously executed 15 times. It should be noted that an opening that is long enough to allow a game ball to be sufficiently expected to be opened (for example, 25 seconds or 29.5 seconds) is referred to as long-time opening. Also, in the big hit game based on the 15R normal big hit and the 15R probability variable big hit, in the big hit game, the big winning opening is controlled to the open state in the round 1, the round game of the round 15 is finished, and the big winning opening is closed. In the case of a big hit game based on a sudden appearance big hit, the round game of round 15 ends after the period of the high speed release control has elapsed and the open state control is started for 25 seconds. The period until the special winning opening is controlled to be closed is referred to as a long open period. In this example, in the case of a sudden appearance and a big hit, at the beginning of Round 1, the big prize opening is configured to repeat the opening for 0.052 seconds and the closing for 2 seconds 15 times. However, the opening time, the closing time, and the number of times of opening are not limited to the above, and the number of times of opening may be a number (for example, 10 times) smaller than the number of times of opening corresponding to the sudden change large hit or small hit. Even if the number of times of opening is less than the number of times of opening according to sudden probability change big hit or small hit, it is difficult for the player to identify whether it is a sudden positive change big hit or small hit or a sudden appearance big hit It is. Further, at the beginning of round 1, the big winning opening may be controlled by an opening pattern in which the opening is controlled for 29.5 seconds. In this example, when it becomes a stubborn big hit, after a period when the high speed opening control is performed, the opening time of the big winning opening is 25 seconds or 29.5 seconds so that it becomes a long opening period. Although configured, the opening may be performed for a long time during the period in which the high speed opening control is performed, and then the high speed opening control may be performed.

  Next, the prize ball process (step S32 in the timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball processing in step S32. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56), the prize ball command output counter addition process (step S501), the prize ball control process (step S502), and the prize ball counter subtraction process (step S503). ).

  In the prize ball command output counter addition process, a prize ball number table shown in FIG. 23 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “5”) is set to the start address of the prize ball number table, and then the lower address of the switch-on buffer, the lower address of the prize ball command output counter, the switch input bit designation value, The prize ball number data for designating the number of prize balls is sequentially set. The prize ball command output counter is a counter that counts the number of prizes received in the prize opening, and is set in the ROM 54, for example. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a corresponding prize ball command output counter for each number of prize balls (0 to 15). In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a prize ball command output counter 1 corresponding to the prize ball number “15” and prize ball command output counters 2, 3 (2) corresponding to the prize ball number “10”. Corresponding to the normal winning ports 29 and 30), and prize ball command output counters 4 and 5 corresponding to the number of prize balls “3”. Each prize ball command output counter is counted up by prize ball command output counter addition processing, as will be described later. If the prize ball command output counter 1 set in the prize ball number table is not 0, the CPU 56 indicates the prize ball number (15) based on the prize ball number data designating the prize ball number (15). The data is set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command, and the set winning ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. The CPU 56 determines the number of prize balls (10) if the value of the prize ball command output counter 1 set in the prize ball number table is 0 and the value of the prize ball command output counters 2 and 3 is not 0. Data indicating the number of winning balls (10) is set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command, and the set winning ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. To do. Further, the CPU 56 must set the value of the prize ball command output counter 1 and the prize ball command output counters 2 and 3 set in the prize ball number table to 0, and the value of the prize ball command output counters 4 and 5 must be 0. For example, data indicating the number of winning balls (3) is set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball number command based on the winning ball number data designating the number of winning balls (3), and the set winning ball number command is set. Is sent to the payout control microcomputer 370. In FIG. 23, the switch-on buffer 1 corresponds to the input port 0, and the switch-on buffer 2 corresponds to the input port 2.

  24 and 25 are flowcharts showing the prize ball command output counter addition process in step S501. In the prize ball command output counter addition process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) sets the start address of the prize ball number table to the pointer (step S5101). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (step S5102).

  Next, the CPU 56 increments the pointer value by 1 (step S5103), loads the lower address of the switch-on buffer pointed to by the pointer into the lower byte of the pointer buffer (step S5104), and loads the switch-on buffer pointed by the pointer buffer into the register. (Step S5105). Next, the CPU 56 increments the value of the pointer by 1 (step S5106), and loads the lower address of the prize ball command output counter pointed to by the pointer into the lower byte of the pointer buffer (step S5107). Next, the CPU 56 increments the value of the pointer by 1 (step S5108), and calculates the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer loaded into the register and the switch winning bit designation value pointed to by the pointer (step S5109). Then, the CPU 56 increases the value of the pointer by 1 (step S5110). When the pointer value is incremented by 1 in step S5110, the pointer value indicates the address where the prize ball number data in the prize ball number table is stored.

  Next, if the calculation result in step S5109 is 0 (Y in step S5111), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is not in the on state, the CPU 56 decreases the number of processes by 1 (step S5128). If NO is 0, the process is terminated. If the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S5103 (step S5129).

  If the calculation result in step S5109 is not 0 (N in step S5111), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the CPU 56 performs processing for exchanging the pointer buffer value and the pointer value. This is performed (step S5112). In this case, the value of the pointer indicates the address where the prize ball number data in the prize ball number table is stored by executing the process of step S5110, and the value of the pointer buffer is the value of step S5107. As a result, the lower address of the prize ball command output counter has been loaded, so that the value of the pointer buffer becomes the number of prize balls by executing the exchange process in step S5112. The table indicates the address where the prize ball number data is stored, and the value of the pointer indicates the lower address of the prize ball command output counter.

  Next, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the prize ball command output counter pointed to by the pointer (step S5113). However, when a carry occurs in the value of the prize ball command output counter as a result of the addition, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the prize ball command output counter and restores the original value (steps S5114 and S5115). Then, the process proceeds to step S5116. In steps S5113 to S5115, the CPU 56 first loads the value of the prize ball command output counter into the register, adds 1 to the value of the register, and that no carry has occurred in the value of the register after the addition. After confirming, the value after addition may be stored in the prize ball command output counter. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the waste of subtracting again after adding the value of the prize ball command output counter.

  Next, the CPU 56 counts the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls based on the detection of winning in any one of the winning winning openings (start winning winning openings 13, 14, large winning opening, ordinary winning openings 29, 30). The lower address of the winning counter is loaded into the lower byte of the pointer (step S5116). Next, the CPU 56 loads the prize ball number data pointed to by the pointer buffer (step S5117). Next, the CPU 56 reads the value of the winning counter pointed by the pointer, and adds the read value to the number of winning balls indicated by the winning ball number data loaded in step S5117 (step S5118). By executing the calculation of step S5118, the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls obtained by adding the number of winning balls for newly generated winning balls is obtained. Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the pointer (step S5119).

  In this embodiment, in the ROM 54, the winning information storage counter is set in the area of the address immediately before the area where the winning counter is set. The winning information storage counter is a counter for counting the number of possible output of winning signals. For example, if the value of the winning information storage counter is 1, a winning signal is output once in an information output process described later. If the value of the winning information storage counter is 2, control for outputting the winning signal twice is performed in the information output process described later. In this embodiment, the pointer value is decremented by 1 in step S5119, so that the pointer value indicates the lower address of the prize ball information output counter.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls calculated in step S5118 is equal to or greater than a predetermined winning output determination value (10 in this example) (step S5120). If the cumulative value of the planned number of winning balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined winning output determination value (10 in this example), the CPU 56 determines a predetermined winning output determination value from the cumulative value of the planned number of winning balls calculated in step S5118. (10 in this example) corresponding to is subtracted (step S5121). Then, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the winning information storage counter pointed to by the pointer (step S5122). However, when a carry occurs in the value of the winning information storage counter as a result of the addition, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning information storage counter and restores the original value (steps S5123 and S5124). Then, the process returns to step S5120. In steps S5122 to S5124, the CPU 56 first loads the value of the winning information storage counter into the register, adds 1 to the register value, and confirms that no carry has occurred in the register value after the addition. After confirmation, the value after addition may be stored in the winning information storage counter. By doing so, it is possible to prevent wasteful re-subtraction after adding the value of the winning information storage counter.

  On the other hand, if the cumulative value of the estimated number of winning balls calculated in step S5118 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined winning output determination value (10 in this example) (that is, less than 9), the process proceeds to step S5125.

  By executing the processing of steps S5120 to S5124, in this embodiment, every time a predetermined number of payout conditions are satisfied (every time 10 winning balls are won), the winning information storage counter The value is incremented by 1, and a winning signal is output to the outside by an information output process described later.

  In addition, the cumulative value of the planned number of prize balls calculated in step S5118 may be 20 or more. For example, if the count value of the winning counter is 9, and a winning to the big winning opening occurs and 15 new winning balls are generated, the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls in step S5118. Will be required as 24. In this case, it is determined as Y in step S5120, and the value of the winning information storage counter is incremented by 1 in step S5122 (in this case, the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls is subtracted by 10 in the process of step S5121 to become 14). ) Once again, it is determined as Y in step S5120, the value of the prize information storage counter is incremented by 1 in step S5122, and the value of the prize information storage counter is incremented by 2 while one prize ball command output counter addition process is executed. Will be.

  In this embodiment, in the prize ball command output counter addition process during the prize ball process, whether or not the cumulative value of the planned number of prize balls is 10 or more by executing the processes of steps S5120 to S5124. It is shown that the control is performed so that the winning information storage counter is added and the winning signal is output, but the winning signal output processing method is limited to that shown in this embodiment. I can't. For example, in the prize ball command output counter addition process, only the prize counter addition process is performed. In the information output process in step S31, it is determined whether the value of the prize counter is 10 or more. If there is, it may be controlled to output a winning signal. In this case, similarly to the above, if the value of the winning counter is 20 or more, in the information output process, the process of determining whether or not the winning counter value is 10 or more is repeatedly executed, and the value of the winning information storage counter is determined. May be processed so that the winning signal can be output twice.

  In addition, for example, in this embodiment, after the winning information storage counter is updated, a winning signal is externally output based on the value of the winning information storage counter in the information output processing described later. Instead of using the winning information storage counter, if it is determined in step S5120 that the accumulated value is 10 or more, the winning signal external output processing may be immediately performed within the winning ball command output counter addition processing. . In this case, in this embodiment, the result accumulated value of the calculation in step S5118 is 10 or more and less than 20, and it is necessary to output the winning signal once, and the result accumulated value of the calculation in step S5118 is 20 or more (this In the embodiment, there are two cases where it is necessary to output the winning signal twice, never exceeding 30). Therefore, for example, as a table for outputting a winning signal, a table for outputting a winning signal once (a table in which the ON time and OFF time of one winning signal are set) and a winning signal are continuously provided. A table for outputting twice (a table in which the on time and off time of the winning signal for two times are set) may be prepared. Then, if the calculated accumulated value is 10 or more and less than 20, a control for outputting the winning signal once outside is performed in the winning ball command output counter addition process using the table for outputting the winning signal once. If the calculated cumulative value is 20 or more, a table for outputting the winning signal twice is used, and the control for outputting the winning signal twice continuously in the winning ball command output counter addition process is performed. May be.

  If the cumulative value calculated in step S5118 exceeds 20, as described above, the winning signal is continuously generated in the winning ball command output counter adding process using the table for outputting the winning signal twice. In the prize ball command output counter addition process, the determination process in step S5120 is repeatedly performed until the calculation result is less than 10, and the winning signal is externally output twice in succession. You may do it. Also, for example, when the winning ball command output counter addition process executed within one timer interrupt is performed so that a winning signal is output only once, and when the next timer interrupt is executed, the winning ball command output counter addition process is executed. The next winning signal may be externally output based on the accumulated value being 10 or more.

  Next, in step S5125, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the pointer value (therefore, the pointer value returns to the state indicating the lower address of the winning counter). Next, the CPU 56 stores the calculation result of the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls in the winning counter indicated by the pointer (step S5126). In this case, if the process proceeds to step S5125 and subsequent steps without being determined as Y once in step S5120, the cumulative value of the expected number of winning balls obtained in step S5118 is stored as it is in the winning counter. become. If it is determined as Y in step S5120 and the processing from step S5121 is executed, the cumulative value of the planned number of winning balls after subtraction is stored in the winning counter in step S5121. As a result of the determination process in step S5120 and the subtraction process in step S5121, the value less than 10 is always stored in the winning counter in step S5126.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of exchanging the pointer buffer value and the pointer value (step S5127). In this case, since the address at which the winning ball number data in the winning ball number table is stored is saved in the pointer buffer by executing the process of step S5112, the processing of step S5127 is executed. The pointer value is returned to the state indicating the address where the prize ball number data in the prize ball number table is stored again.

  Then, the CPU 56 reduces the number of processes by 1 (step S5128), ends the process if the number of processes is 0, and returns to step S5103 if the number of processes is not 0 (step S5129).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control process in step S502. In the prize ball control process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) executes any one of steps S521 to S525 in accordance with the value of the prize ball process code.

  In the prize ball transmission process 1 (step S521), the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting a connection confirmation command to the payout control microcomputer 370. In the winning ball connection confirmation process (step S522), when the connection OK command corresponding to the connection confirmation command is received from the payout control microcomputer 370 from the payout control microcomputer 370, the CPU 56 is indicated by the connection OK command. Processing for transmitting error information indicating an error related to payout control to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In the prize ball transmission process 2 (step S523), when an error has not occurred in the payout control, the CPU 56 performs control to send a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out to the payout control microcomputer 370. Do. In the prize ball reception confirmation process (step S524), the CPU 56 performs a process according to the command transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 in accordance with the transmitted prize ball number command. In the winning ball end confirmation process (step S525), the CPU 56 performs processing according to whether or not the paying out of the winning ball has ended.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the prize ball counter subtraction process in step S503. In the prize ball counter subtraction process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the prize ball information input invalid timer has timed out (step S5301). The prize ball information input invalid timer is a timer that is measured in order to provide an interval period after confirming the input of prize ball information until confirming the input of the next prize ball information. If not timed out, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the prize ball information input invalid timer (step S5302) and ends the process.

  If the prize ball information input invalid timer has timed out, the CPU 56 inputs the contents of the input port 0 (step S5303), and checks whether or not the bit of the prize ball information is on (step S5304). If the bit of the prize ball information is on, the process proceeds to step S5305.

  In step S5305, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined prize ball information confirmation count (for example, 8) as the number of processes (step S5305). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the prize ball information is input, and if the input of the prize ball information can be confirmed, the CPU 56 adds the value of the prize ball information on counter to 1 and the number of processes (8 in this example). The process is repeated until the process is completed (steps S5306 to S5308).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the prize ball information on counter is 6 or more (step S5309). If the value of the prize ball information on counter is 6 or more, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (for example, 0.8 seconds) in the prize ball information input invalid timer (step S5310) and sets the value of the prize ball number counter to 10 Subtraction is performed (step S5311).

  By executing the above processing, in this embodiment, it is determined that the prize ball information has been inputted on the condition that the prize ball information has been inputted 6 times or more out of the 8 confirmation processes, and 10 pieces of prize ball information are entered. The value of the prize ball number counter is decremented by 10 assuming that the prize ball has been paid out. By such processing, in this embodiment, the situation where it is determined that the prize ball information is erroneously input is reduced, and the game control microcomputer 560 side cannot properly grasp the number of prize balls that have not been paid out. It is preventing.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value after subtraction is less than a predetermined prize ball excess determination value (for example, 0) (step S5312). When the count value of the prize ball number counter is less than a predetermined prize ball excess determination value (for example, 0), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the prize ball error flag is already set (step S5313). If the prize ball error flag has already been set, the process is terminated. If the prize ball error flag is not set, the CPU 56 sets the prize ball error flag (step S5314) and controls to send a prize ball excess error command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S5315). Specifically, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the address of the winning ball excessive error command transmission table as a pointer. Then, based on the fact that the address of the prize ball excess error command transmission table is set in the pointer in step S5315, the effect symbol command control process in step S30 is executed, so that the prize ball excess error command is effect controlled. To the microcomputer 100 for use.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S28) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, the CPU 56 receives a game ball in the first start port switch 13a or the second start port 14 for detecting that a game ball has won the first start winning port 13. If the second start port switch 14a for detecting this is turned on, that is, if a start winning is generated, start port switch passing processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 30), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and when all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Also, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. Further, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 is turned on by the first start port switch 13a. Whether or not (step S211). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number is 4 (step S212). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4, the process proceeds to step S221.

  If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S214).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  In the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total hold memory number counter is secured. Then, data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (step S215). In the process of step S215, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  In the first reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes prize-winning effect processing for preliminarily determining the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected winning prize is executed (step S216A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a winning determination result specifying command (design specifying command) to the effect controlling microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S216B) and the first reserved storage number. Control for transmitting the addition designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S216C).

  By executing the process of step S216B, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state), the CPU 56 Every time a start winning is made in the first start winning opening 13, a symbol designating command is always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (step S217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a total pending storage number designation command indicating the total pending storage number based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (step S218). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the first start winning designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (step S221). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 4 (step S222). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated. If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the CPU 56 may perform the process of confirming again whether the first start port switch 13a is on (see step S211).

  If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S223). Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (step S225). In the process of step S225, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes winning effect processing (step S226A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a winning determination result specifying command (design specifying command) to the effect controlling microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S226B) and the second reserved storage number. Control for transmitting the addition designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S226C).

  By executing the processing of step S226B, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state), the CPU 56 Every time a start winning prize is awarded to the second start winning opening 14, a symbol designation command is always transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending storage number counter by 1 (step S227). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a total pending storage number designation command based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (step S228). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the second start winning designation command.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S216A and S216B. In the winning effect process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S215A and S215B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By performing the effect processing at the time of winning a prize, it is confirmed in advance whether or not a big hit or a small hit will be made and the type of the big hit. By doing so, the variation display result is predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and as will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect symbol based on the determination result at the time of winning. A continuous notice effect is announced to announce that a big hit or super reach will be displayed during the fluctuation display.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state. High probability / high base state and high probability / It is confirmed whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S215A and S215B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. (If there is a 15R probability variation big hit, sudden appearance big hit, or sudden probability variation big hit, the normal state is changed to the probability changed state.). For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) are not necessarily the same.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S215A and S215B and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing (see step S216A) in the first start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 29A). Is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. Further, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect process (see step S216B) is executed in the second start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 29B), FIG. It is determined whether or not the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. If the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data “05 (05) indicating“ small hit ”. H) ”is set in the symbol designation command (step S225).

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S215A and S215B. Is determined (step S226). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing (see step S216A) in the first start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 29A). The big hit types are “15R probability variable big hit”, “15R normal big hit”, “surprise masquerade big hit”, and “sudden probability variable big hit” using the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a shown in FIG. Or "". Further, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect process (see step S216B) is executed in the second start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 29B), FIG. Using the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b shown in FIG. 13 (E), the jackpot type is one of “15R probability variable big hit”, “15R normal big hit”, “abrupt masquerade big hit” and “suddenly probable big hit” Determine which of the following.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S227). In this case, when it is determined that “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “01 (H)” indicating “15R probability variation big hit” to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that the “15R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “15R normal big hit” to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that the “accuracy masquerade jackpot” is determined, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data “03 (H)” indicating that the ‘accuracy masquerade jackpot’ is set in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “suddenly probable big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  31 and 32 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  In step S51, the CPU 56 does not check the value of the total reserved memory number, but checks whether or not data is set in the first area of the reserved specific area. If it is not set, it may be determined that there is no reserved storage, and the process may proceed to step S51A.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area is data indicating “first” (step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol (step S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the first special symbol changes in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls win the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Although the case where it is displayed is shown, you may comprise so that a variable display of any one of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed preferentially. In this case, for example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second starting winning port 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated. The special symbol variation display may be executed with priority.

  In the case where the display is performed with priority on the display of the variation of the second special symbol, in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing with the value may be executed and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is executed, and the processes of steps S221 and S222 are performed) You may not do it). With such a configuration, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1, and sets the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area in. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory number buffer are displayed. shift.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the probability change state background designation command if the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating the high base state is not set. . Further, if the high probability flag and the high base flag are set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a short time state background designation command. If the high probability flag is not set and the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a low probability high base state background designation command. Further, when neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect symbol command control process (step S30). In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the effect control microcomputer in the order of the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved memory number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. 100 will be transmitted. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage count subtraction designation command is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for determining the big hit that has been extracted in step S215A of the first start port switch passing process or step S215B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 13) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining the big hit or the small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  In the big hit determination process, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the probability that the game state is a big hit than when the gaming state is non-probability change state (normal state) Is configured to be high. Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 13A in the ROM 54 are set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 13A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 13A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state is determined by whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, and is reset when the next big hit occurs.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 13B and 13C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 13D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“15R probability variation big hit”, “ "15R normal big hit", "abrupt probable big hit" or "suddenly promising big hit") is determined as the big hit type (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type that is extracted in step S215A of the first start port switch passing process or step S215B of the second start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Further, as shown in FIGS. 13D and 13E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability change is suddenly changed as compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The rate at which jackpots are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “15R normal big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the jackpot type is “Suddenly Predictive Jackpot”, “03” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and “04” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type when the jackpot type is “Suddenly Probable Big Hit”. Is done.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol To do. In other words, if the jackpot type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is determined to be a special symbol stop symbol, and “3” is determined to be a special symbol stop symbol if it is determined to be “promising big hit”. When “15R normal big hit” is decided, “9” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “15R probability variable big hit” is decided, “7” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. . When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not restricted to what was shown in embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 14D) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). The high base flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, or when the small hit game based on the small hit is ended, and is reset when the high base state is ended. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probable big hit”, “probable probable big hit”, “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game or “small hit game”. . In addition, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times).

  If the high base flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 15A) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 15B) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high base flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is the high base state, the CPU 56 uses the variable pattern type to determine one of a plurality of types. As the table to be selected, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 15C) is selected (step S101). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S101 is executed, and the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is the high base state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 15C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 17). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the high base state or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a variation display of the shortening variation may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the high base state (see FIG. 15C) and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage (FIG. 15 ( Although the table shown in FIG. B) is different from the above table, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a high base state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1), The change display of the shortening change may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 15A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of steps S92, S94, S98, S99 or S101. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 16) as tables used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 17) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a non-reach variation pattern type determination table (including the non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 variation pattern types shown in FIG. 15) and a reach variation pattern type determination table (FIG. 15). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” in the winning effect process, the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range in the reach determination table. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable to make a continuous notice effect by determining in advance whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing display result designation command transmission processing (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 6 designation) (see FIG. 18) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S118. When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is “15R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. it can. Further, when the type of jackpot is “15R normal jackpot”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not it is “15R normal big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can. In addition, when the type of jackpot is “surprise appearance jackpot”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S115 and S116). Specifically, whether or not it is a “surprising masquerade jackpot” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “03”. it can. Then, when it is not any of “15R probability variation big hit”, “15R normal big hit”, and “abrupt probable big hit” (that is, “suddenly probable big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command. This is performed (step S117).

  When the big hit flag is not set (N in Step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (Step S118). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 6 designation command (step S119). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S118), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S120).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S121).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the big hit type is a sudden probability change big hit (Y in step S132A), and if the high probability flag or the high base flag is set (Y in step S132B), A high base ascertainment flag is set (step S132C). The high base surprise flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state when the sudden probability big hit has occurred is a high probability state or a high base state, and is reset after the process of step S167C.

  If set, the CPU 56 outputs a high probability flag indicating the high probability state, a high base flag indicating the high base state, and a signal indicating the high probability state to the outside of the gaming machine. A high-accuracy medium output permission flag indicating that permission to perform is reset (step S132D), and control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “15R probability variable jackpot” or “15R normal jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of jackpot is “abrupt probable jackpot” or “sudden probability change big hit”, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted.

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). Further, the CPU 56 sets the release pattern data in which the release pattern for the round 1 of the big prize opening corresponding to the big hit type is set (step S135A). Further, the CPU 56 sets 1 to the round number counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game (step S135B). The opening pattern will be described later.

  When the big hit type is a sudden hit big hit (Y in step S135C), or when the high base hit probability flag is set (Y in step S135D), the CPU 56 sets a big hit three signal timer, which will be described later, in the case of a sudden hit big hit. In the opening pattern, the time from the start of opening / closing control of the big prize opening to the start of control for opening the big prize opening for a long time (in this example, until the opening control of 29.5 seconds is started) A value corresponding to (time) is set (step S136).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S137).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S130 (N in step S131) and the high base flag is set (Y in step S141), the CPU 56 counts the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the high base state. 1 is subtracted from the value of the high base number counter (step S142), and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the high base number counter is 0 (step S143). If the value of the high base number counter is 0 (Y in step S143), the high base flag is reset (step S144).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying that the small hit has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the timer before opening the big prize opening (step S147). In the case of a small hit game, at the start of the small hit game, in step S147, the time required from the start of the variable display to the start of the small hit game is set in the timer before opening the big prize opening. . Further, during the small hit game, the interval time between each opening of the big winning opening is set in the timer before the big winning opening.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the high-speed opening control of the special winning opening is performed in the same manner in appearance in the case of suddenly probable big hit and small hit (see FIG. 20 (1)). ), Suddenly making it difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the number of times of opening in the number-of-opening counter (step S148A) and sets 0 in the winning number counter (step S148B). In this embodiment, 15 times is set in the opening number counter in step S148A. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  Next, opening pattern data used for opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game will be described. 36 to 38 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of opening pattern data used for opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game.

  First, with reference to FIG. 36, a description will be given of the opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the sudden appearance big hit. As shown in FIG. 36, in the case of a sudden appearance jackpot, in round 1, the number of processes 31, data of 15 repetitions of an opening time of 0.052 seconds and a closing time of 2 seconds, a closing time of 9 seconds, An opening pattern in which an opening time of 25 seconds is set is used. Therefore, when it is a surprise appearance big hit, and when round 1 is executed, the opening pattern data shown in FIG. 36 is set in step S135A, and the processing for opening a winning opening described later is executed. Is operated 15 times continuously for 0.052 seconds, then the grand prize opening is closed for 9 seconds, the stage period of the introduction effect is secured, and the grand prize opening is further closed for 25 seconds. After opening control, an interval time of 2 seconds is set in step S1472 to be described later, and the next round 2 is started after 2 seconds.

  Further, in rounds 2 to 15, release pattern data in which the number of processes 1 and the release time 29.5 seconds are set for each round is used. Therefore, when rounds 2 to 15 are executed, one of the opening pattern data for rounds 2 to 15 shown in FIG. 36 is set in step S1474 and the process for opening a special prize opening described later is executed. The big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state for 29.5 seconds, and then an interval time of 2 seconds is set in step S1472 to be described later, and the control for shifting to the next round is repeated after 2 seconds.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a description will be given of the opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit. As shown in FIG. 37, in the case of sudden probable big hit, open pattern data in which data of 15 repetitions of an open time of 0.052 seconds and a close time of 2 seconds is set is used. In the case of a sudden probability change big hit, the opening pattern data shown in FIG. 37 is set in step S135A, and the process of opening the winning a prize opening described later is executed, whereby the winning a prize opening is controlled to be open for 0.052 seconds. The operation is continuously performed 15 times.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the opening control of the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the 15R normal big hit or the 15R probability variable big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the case of 15R normal big hit or 15R probable big hit, open pattern data in which the number of processes 1 and the open time 29.5 seconds are set for each round is used. Therefore, when round 1 is executed, release pattern data for round 1 shown in FIG. 38 is set in step S135A, and when rounds 2 to 15 are executed, rounds 2 to 15 shown in FIG. 38 are shown in step S1474. Is set to open state, and the process for opening a special prize opening, which will be described later, is executed, whereby the special prize opening is controlled to be in an open state for 29.5 seconds. Thereafter, in step S1472 described later, an interval time 2 is set. Seconds are set, and the control of shifting to the next round after 2 seconds has elapsed is repeated.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S305) executed before each round in the big hit game. In the process for pre-opening the big prize opening, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the timer before opening the big prize opening by 1 (step S1401). When the timer before opening the big prize opening times out (the value of the timer before opening the big prize opening is 0) (step S1402), the CPU 56 sets the value of the current round number counter in the EXT data, and produces the microcomputer 100 for effect control. Is controlled to transmit a special winning opening opening designation command (step S1403). Further, the CPU 56 initializes a winning number counter (step S1404). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero.

  Next, the CPU 56 initializes the value of the pointer to 0 (step S1405), and reads and sets the value of the number of processes in the release pattern data pointed to by the pointer (step S1406). Next, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the pointer (step S1407), reads the opening time set next to the number of processes in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer, and determines the opening time or closing time of the big prize opening. An opening / closing time timer for measurement is set (step S1408).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the number of processes (step S1409), and controls the special winning opening (combination) to be in an open state (step S1410). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the opening / closing plate 16. Further, the CPU 56 sets a special winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening is controlled to be in an open state (step S1411).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S306) (step S1412).

  40 and 41 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening process (step S306). In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the detection signal from the count switch 23 has been input (step S1451). When the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the big winning opening is detected (Y in step S1451), the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (step S1452). Then, when the value of the winning prize counter after the addition becomes 10 (step S1453), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1467.

  If the value of the winning number counter is less than 10, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the open / close time timer (step S1454), and checks whether the open / close time timer has timed out (step S1455). If the open / close time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated. If the open / close time timer has timed out, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the number of processes is 0 (step S1456). If the number of processes is 0 (that is, if control based on all opening times and closing times set in the opening pattern data has been completed), the process proceeds to step S1467.

  If the number of processes is not 0 (that is, if a set value of unprocessed opening time or closing time remains in the opening pattern data), the CPU 56 adds 1 to the pointer (step S1457), and the big prize opening is opened. It is checked whether the middle flag is set (step S1458).

  If the big prize opening opening flag is not set (that is, if the big prize opening is closed), the CPU 56 reads the opening time in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer and sets it in the opening / closing time timer (step). S1459). Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the number of processes (step S1460), and controls the special winning opening (combination) to be in an open state (step S1461). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the opening / closing plate 16. Further, the CPU 56 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S1462). Then, the process ends.

  If the big prize opening open flag is set (that is, if the big prize opening is open), the CPU 56 reads the closing time in the opening pattern data pointed to by the pointer, and sets it in the opening / closing time timer (step). S1463). Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the number of processes (step S 1464), and controls the special winning opening (combination) to be closed (step S 1465). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 21 is stopped and the open / close plate 16 is closed. Further, the CPU 56 resets the special winning opening open flag (step S1466). Then, the process ends.

  In this embodiment, even in one round, if a plurality of opening times and closing times are set in the opening pattern data, the processing of steps S1456 to S1466 is repeated until the number of processing becomes zero. Is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 36, in round 1 for sudden appearance big hit, the process is completed for all 16 open times and 15 close times set in the open pattern data for round 1 The process of steps S1456 to S1466 is repeated until it is done (it is repeated 31 times because the number of processes 31 is set), and the big prize opening is controlled to be opened and closed several times during one round. Similarly, the processes in steps S1456 to S1466 are repeatedly executed in the first round of sudden probability change big hit shown in FIG.

  In step S1467, the CPU 56 performs processing for ending the round. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the special winning opening open flag is set (step S1467). If the big prize opening open flag is not set (that is, if the big prize opening is already closed), the process proceeds to step S1470. If the big prize opening open flag is set (that is, if the big prize opening is in an open state), the CPU 56 controls the big prize opening (a bonus item) to be closed (step S1468). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 21 is stopped and the open / close plate 16 is closed. Further, the CPU 56 resets the special winning opening open flag (step S1469).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to set the current round number counter value to EXT data and to transmit a designation command after opening the special winning opening to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1470).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is a value corresponding to the jackpot type (step S1471). In this example, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 15. Note that the value to be compared with the value of the round number counter may be different depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, for example, when the big hit type is 15R normal big hit, 15R probability variable big hit, or sudden appearance big hit, it is confirmed whether the value of the round number counter is 15 (that is, 15R normal big hit, 15R positive change) Check whether all rounds (rounds 1 to 15) in the jackpot game based on the jackpot or the masquerade jackpot are finished, and if the jackpot type is suddenly odd jackpot, the number of rounds counter is 2 (That is, whether or not all rounds (rounds 1 and 2) in the jackpot game based on the sudden probability change jackpot have been completed. And the value of the round number counter is a value corresponding to the jackpot type. If it is (15 in this example), the CPU 56 sets the value of the special symbol process flag to the jackpot end process. Step S307) to update the value that corresponds (Step S1476).

  If the value of the round counter is not a value corresponding to the type of jackpot (that is, if there are still remaining rounds), the CPU 56 sets the pre-round start time (a new round is started) in the timer before opening the big prize opening. For example, a value (in this example, 2 seconds) corresponding to a time (in which an interval effect is performed and corresponds to a period) to be notified in the effect display device 9 is set (step S1472).

  Next, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the round number counter (step S1473). Further, the CPU 56 sets release pattern data (see FIGS. 29 to 34) in which a winning pattern opening pattern is set according to the type of jackpot and the number of rounds to be started next (step S1474). Note that the number of rounds to be started next can be specifically determined from the value of the round number counter after the addition.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S1475). If the big hit type is a sudden probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1476 in step S1471 regardless of the value of the round number counter.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, when the hit is 15R normal big hit, the big hit end 1 designation command is transmitted, and when it is the 15R probability variation big hit or sudden appearance big hit, the big hit end 2 designation command is sent, and when the sudden probability variation big hit Is transmitted with a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether the jackpot type is 15R normal jackpot (step S166). Whether or not it is a 15R normal big hit can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “02”. If it is not 15R normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the high probability flag to shift the gaming state to the high probability state (step S167A), and if the big hit type is not suddenly probable big hit, the CPU 56 moves to step S168 (in step S167B). N). If the type of big hit is suddenly a probable big hit (Y in step S167B), if the high base rush flag is set in the process of step S132C, the high base rush flag is reset and the process proceeds to step S168 and must be set. Then, the process proceeds to step S170 (step S167C). In step S168, the CPU 56 sets the high base flag to shift the gaming state to the high base state (step S168), and sets the value of the high base number counter to 100 (step S169). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S170). Therefore, when the type of jackpot is suddenly probable big hit, the high base flag is not set when the gaming state when the sudden chance big jackpot occurs is not a high probability state and low base state, Do not transition to high base state.

  In this example, the high base flag is set, the high base number counter value is set to 100, and the high base flag is reset when the 100th variation of the special symbol is finished after the transition to the high base state. However, it may be configured such that the high base state is continued until the next big hit occurs.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) executed in the small hit game. In the pre-opening process for small hits, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the timer for opening the big prize opening by -1 (step S2470). If the timer before opening the big prize opening times out (the value of the timer before opening the big prize opening is 0) (Y in step S2471), the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 0.052) in the opening time timer. (Step S2473). Next, the CPU 56 controls the special winning opening (a bonus item) to be in an open state. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the open / close plate 16 (step S2474). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit releasing process (step S309) (step S2475). If the timer before opening the big prize opening has not timed out (N in step S2471), the CPU 56 detects the value of the winning number counter when the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the big prize opening is detected. +1.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the small hit releasing process (step S309). In the small hit opening process, the CPU 56 first decrements the value of the opening time timer (step S2481), and checks whether the opening time timer has timed out (step S2482). If the open time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step S2486. If the opening time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 increments the value of the winning number counter by +1 (step S2484) when the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the big winning opening is detected (step S2483). ). If the value of the winning prize counter after the addition becomes 10 (step S2485), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S2486.

  In step S2486, the CPU 56 performs a process for ending the round. Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 21 is stopped and the open / close plate 16 is closed. Next, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the opening number counter by -1 (step S2488). When the value of the number-of-releases counter is not 0 (N in Step S2490), the process proceeds to Step S2490. When the value of the number-of-opens counter is 0 (Y in step S2490), that is, when all the big winning openings in the small hit game have been completed, the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small value. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the winning end process (step S310) (step S2492).

  In step S2490, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the pre-opening time of the big prize opening (corresponding to the interval time between each opening of the big prize opening) in the timer before opening the big prize opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (step S2491).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S310) in the special symbol process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step S2160). If the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2164. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the small hit flag is reset (step S2161), and a control for transmitting a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command is performed (step S2162). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step S2163). finish.

  In step S2164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S2165A). If not, the process ends.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2165), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2166).

  Next, the switch process (step S21) in the timer interrupt process will be described. In this embodiment, when the ON state of the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passage continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is surely turned on, and processing corresponding to the switch on is started. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing each 2-byte buffer formed in the RAM 55 used in the switching process. The previous port buffer is a buffer in which the previous switch-on / off determination result (for example, 4 ms before) is stored. The port buffer is a buffer in which the contents of ports 0 and 2 input this time are stored. The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which the corresponding bit is set to 1 when switch on is detected and the corresponding bit is set to 0 when switch off is detected. The previous port buffer, port buffer, and switch-on buffer shown in FIG. 46 are prepared for each of the input ports 0 and 2. For example, in this embodiment, two switch-on buffers 1 and 2 are prepared, the switch state of the input port 0 is set to the switch-on buffer 1, and the switch state of the input port 2 is the switch-on buffer 2. Set to

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a processing example of the switch processing in step S21 in the game control processing. In the switch process, the game control microcomputer 560 first inputs data input to the input ports 0 and 2 (see FIG. 7) (step S2101), and sets the input data in the port buffer (step S2102). ).

  Next, the initial value of the weight counter formed in the RAM 55 is set (step S2103), and the value of the weight counter is decremented by 1 (steps S2104 and S2105) until the weight counter value becomes zero.

  When the value of the wait counter reaches 0, the data of the input ports 0 and 2 are input again (step S2106), and a logical product is obtained for each bit between the input data and the data set in the port buffer. (Step S2107). Then, the operation result of the logical product is set in the port buffer (step S2108). Of the two input data input from the input ports 0 and 2 with a time interval of approximately [initial value of wait counter × (processing time of steps S2104 and S2105)], two times of the input data input by the processing of steps S2103 to S2108 Only the bits that are both “1” become “1” in the port buffer. In other words, if the ON state of the switch detection signal continues for a predetermined period [initial value of wait counter × (processing time of steps S2104 and S2105)], the corresponding bit in the port buffer becomes “1”.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs exclusive OR for each bit between the data previously set in the port buffer and the data set in the port buffer (step S2109). In the result of the exclusive OR operation, the bit corresponding to the switch for which the previous switch-on / off determination result (for example, 4 ms before) differs from the switch-on / off determination result determined to be on this time is “ 1 ”. The game control microcomputer 560 further performs a logical product for each bit between the result of the exclusive OR operation and the data set in the port buffer (step S2110). As a result, of the bits corresponding to the switches for which the previous switch on / off determination result and the switch on / off determination result determined to be on this time are different (according to the exclusive OR operation result), the current on Only the bit corresponding to the switch determined to be (by AND operation) remains as “1”.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the logical product calculation result in step S110 in the switch-on buffer (step S2111), and sets the contents of the port buffer in which the calculation result in step S2108 is set in the previous port buffer. (Step S2112).

  By the above processing, among the switches that have been on for a predetermined period of time, the switch on / off determination result of the previous time (for example, 4 ms ago) was off, that is, the switch changed from the off state to the on state. The bit corresponding to the switch is “1” in the switch-on buffer.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) performs a switch normality / abnormality check process (step S2113).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a switch normal / abnormal check process. In the switch normal / abnormal check process shown in FIG. 48, the CPU 56 reads the contents of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 2 (step S121). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of bit 1 corresponding to the second start port switch 14a in the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 2 is 0 (step S122). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the second start port switch 14a (proximity switch) provided in the upper part of the second start winning port 14 is turned on (a game ball is detected).

  When the value of bit 1 corresponding to the second start port switch 14a in the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 2 is 0 (that is, when the second start port switch 14a is in the on state), it is formed in the RAM 55. The value of the switch counter being incremented is incremented by 1 (step S123).

  Further, the CPU 56 reads the contents of the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 0 (step S124). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of bit 4 corresponding to the winning confirmation switch 14b in the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 0 is 1 (step S125). That is, it is confirmed whether or not a winning confirmation switch 14b (photo sensor) provided at the lower part of the second start winning opening 14 is turned on (a game ball is detected).

  When the value of bit 4 corresponding to the winning confirmation switch 14b in the switch-on buffer corresponding to the input port 0 is 1 (that is, when the winning confirmation switch 14b is in the ON state), the switch formed in the RAM 55 The counter value is decreased by 1 (step S126).

  Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the switch counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (step S127). When the value of the switch counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred, and the security signal information timer has a predetermined time (in this example, 4). Minute) is set (step S128). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (4 minutes in this example) to the security signal information timer based on the fact that the value of the switch counter is 10 or more as a predetermined value. To do. In this embodiment, the abnormal output of the second start winning opening 14 is detected by executing the information output process (see S31) based on the fact that the predetermined time is set in the security signal information timer in step S128. When this is done, the security signal is externally output for a predetermined time (in this example, 4 minutes).

  In the process of step S127, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred based on, for example, the value of the switch counter being 10 or more, On the contrary, even if the value of the switch counter becomes −10 or less, it may be determined that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred. In this case, if the switch counter value is configured so that it cannot be recognized that the value is negative, for example, 10 is set as the default value of the switch counter value. Based on the fact that the counter value becomes 0 or 20 or more, it may be determined that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred.

  In this embodiment, even when a value is already set in the security signal information timer and the security signal is being output to the outside, when a new abnormal winning is detected, the process of step S128 is executed again. The security signal information timer is overwritten with a predetermined time (in this example, 4 minutes). Therefore, when a new abnormal winning is detected during the external output of the security signal, the external output period of the security signal is substantially extended, and a predetermined time (in this example) from the time when the new abnormal winning is detected. 4 minutes) The output of the security signal is continued.

  In this embodiment, the case where the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is detected using only one switch counter is shown. However, the number of detections of the second start opening switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b are shown. Different switch counters may be used depending on the number of times detected. In this case, for example, the value of the counter for the first switch is incremented by 1 each time the on state of the second start port switch 14a is detected, and the second switch is detected every time the on state of the winning confirmation switch 14b is detected. The counter value may be incremented by one. In step S127, based on the determination that the difference between the value of the first switch counter and the value of the second switch counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 10), the process proceeds to the second start winning prize opening 14. It may be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred and the process of step S128 is executed to output the security signal to the outside.

  If it is detected that an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the process of step S128 is executed to output a security signal to the outside, and a predetermined error notification command is sent to the effect control microcomputer. It is desirable that error notification can be performed by displaying a predetermined error screen on the effect display device 9 on the effect control microcomputer 100 side.

  Further, for example, in addition to the abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14, an abnormal winning at the first starting winning opening 13, an abnormal winning at the large winning opening, an abnormal magnetic error, an abnormal radio wave error, and a communication error are detected. In such a case, when the security signal is output, a different error notification command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 for each error type. Then, on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, error notification may be performed by causing the effect display device 9 to display different error screens for each type of error.

  In the above configuration, when power supply is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, an error notification is being issued before the power supply is stopped. The error notification command may be transmitted again to the effect control microcomputer 100. In other words, since the storage content such as RAM is not backed up by the backup power source on the production control microcomputer 100 side, if a power failure occurs, it is not possible to execute the production such as error notification that has been executed until then. However, the error notification can be resumed when the power failure is recovered by configuring the predetermined error notification command to be transmitted again when the power failure is recovered. The game control microcomputer 560 also backs up the value of the security signal information timer in the backup RAM. If the security signal is being output before the power supply is stopped, it is backed up when the power failure is restored. The output of the security signal may be resumed based on the value of the security signal information timer. By providing these configurations, it is possible to prevent an illegal act such as turning off the error notification or stopping the output of the security signal by intentionally turning off the power to the gaming machine.

  FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing various signals output to the terminal board 160. As shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 is connected to the terminal board 160 with a symbol determination count of 1 signal, a start port signal, a jackpot signal, a jackpot. Two signals, three jackpot signals, a time reduction signal, a winning signal, a security signal, and a high probability signal are output by the information output process (see step S31) on the game control microcomputer 560 side. In this embodiment, the prize ball information is sent from the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 to the terminal board 160 via the main board 31. It is output by the information output process on the 370 side (see step S759).

  The symbol determination number 1 signal is a signal for notifying the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The starting port signal is a signal for notifying the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14. The jackpot 1 signal is a signal for notifying that the jackpot game (during the operation of the special variable winning ball apparatus) is in progress. The jackpot 2 signal is a signal for notifying that the jackpot game is in progress (during the operation of the special variable winning ball apparatus) or that the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (during the high base state). The jackpot 3 signal is a signal for notifying that during the jackpot game, a transition to the high base state is made after the jackpot game is over. The time-short signal is a signal for notifying that the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (during the high base state).

  In addition, as described above, the winning signal indicates that a predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 balls) of winning balls is satisfied (the first start winning port 13, This is a signal indicating that a winning has occurred in the second start winning port 14, the big winning port, and the normal winning ports 29, 30. The award ball has not been paid out.

  The security signal is a signal indicating the security state of the gaming machine. Specifically, when it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred based on the detection result of the second starting opening switch 14a and the detection result of the winning confirmation switch 14b, the security signal is It is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 4 minutes). Also, when the gaming machine is turned on and the initialization process is executed, a security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

  It should be noted that the signal output externally as the security signal is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, not only abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14, but abnormal winning at the first starting winning opening 13, the large winning opening, or the normal winning openings 29, 30 can be detected and output as a security signal to the outside. You may comprise as follows. In addition, for example, when abnormal magnetism is detected by a magnet sensor provided in a gaming machine or when abnormal radio waves are detected by a radio wave sensor provided in a gaming machine, it is configured so that it can be output externally as a security signal. Also good. In addition, for example, when an abnormality of various switches provided in a gaming machine is detected (for example, when an occurrence of a short circuit is detected by determining that an input value exceeds a threshold value), it can be externally output as a security signal. You may comprise as follows. In this way, even if an abnormal winning at the big prize opening, abnormal magnetic error, or abnormal radio wave error is configured to be output as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160, even one signal line can be connected. In this case, error detection can be performed by an external device such as a hall computer, and the work load related to error detection can be reduced.

  Further, for example, even when a communication error between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is detected, it can be externally output as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. May be. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that a communication error has occurred based on failure to receive a connection OK command or a prize ball number reception command (to be described later) from the payout control microcomputer 370, and the terminal The security signal may be externally output from the common connector CN8 of the board 160. Also, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that a communication error has occurred based on the value of any error bit in the status register of the serial communication circuit 505 being set, and the terminal board 160 has The connector CN8 may be externally output as a security signal.

  In addition to the signal line and connector CN8 for security signals, a signal line and connector dedicated to communication errors between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 may be provided on the terminal board 160. When a communication error between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 is detected, an external device such as a hall computer is transmitted via the terminal board 160 as a signal different from the security signal. May be output.

  The high probability signal is a signal indicating that the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state (probability change state). In this embodiment, the high-accuracy signal is externally output through the terminal board 160 until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power failure is restored (specifically, until the first big hit occurs).

  The prize ball information is a signal that is output every time a specific number (10 in this example) of prize ball payouts is detected. In this embodiment, a predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls (10 balls in this embodiment) is satisfied (first start winning opening 13, second start winning prize). The winning signal is output to the outside based on the fact that the winning to the mouth 14, the big winning opening, the normal winning openings 29, 30 has occurred), and the number of winning balls can be grasped on the hall side based on the winning signal. Therefore, the prize ball information may be configured not to be output externally. In this example, a winning signal is output to the outside based on a predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. On the other hand, it is conceivable that a winning signal is output externally after the winning ball is paid out. However, if the winning signal is output after the winning ball is paid out, it is considered that the gaming state has changed between winning and outputting the winning signal. It is not possible to accurately manage the game for each game state outside. Therefore, in this example, a winning signal is output to the outside based on a predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls.

  50 to 53 are flowcharts showing the information output processing in step S31. Of the processes shown in FIGS. 50 to 53, steps S1002 to S1020 are processes for outputting a start port signal, steps S1021 to S1023 are processes for outputting a winning signal, and steps S1031 to S1036. Is a process for outputting one signal for the number of symbol determinations, and steps S1037 to S1051 are processes for outputting one signal for big hit, two signals for big hit, three signals for big hit, and a short time signal. Steps S1069 to S1074 are processes for outputting a security signal, and steps S1075 to S1077 are processes for outputting a high-accuracy signal.

  In the information output process, the CPU 56 first sets the address of the start port information setting table in the pointer (step S1002) and loads the number of processes pointed to by the pointer (step S1003). The start port information setting table includes the number of processes (= 2), two start port switch input bits (first start port switch input bit determination value (01 (H))) and second start port switch input bit determination value ( 02 (H))) is set. The first start port switch input bit determination value is a determination value for determining whether or not there is a start winning in the first start winning port 13, and the second start port switch input bit determination value is a second value. This is a determination value for determining whether or not there is a start winning in the start winning opening 14. In step S1003, since the pointer points to the address of the number of processes in the start port information setting table, the data of the number of processes (= 2) in the start port information setting table is loaded.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S1004), and sets the switch-on buffer as switch input data (step S1005). The pointer is incremented by 1 (step S1006), the start port switch input bit pointed to by the pointer is loaded into the register (step S1007), and the logical product of the start port switch input bit and the switch input data is obtained (step S1008). In this case, when the number of processes is 1, the first start port switch input bit is loaded and the logical product of the switch input data is obtained. When the number of processes is 2, the second start port switch input is obtained. The bit is loaded and the logical product of the switch input data is taken. When the number of processes is 1 and the first start port switch 13a is on, the logical product operation result is 01 (H). When the number of processes is 2 and the second start port switch 14a is on, the logical product operation result is 02 (H). When the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are not turned on, the logical product operation result is 00 (H).

  If the logical operation result is 0 (Y in step S1009), the process proceeds to step S1015. If the logical product operation result is not 0 (N in step S1009), it is determined that the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 has been won, and the start opening information storage counter is loaded into the register. (Step S1010). The start port information storage counter is a counter that counts the number of remaining outputs of the start port signal (that is, the remaining number of start winnings that have not been output from the start port signal). Next, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the start port information storage counter (step S1011). Then, it is confirmed whether the calculation result (added result) is not 0 (step S1012). When the calculation result is 0 (N in step S1012), 1 is subtracted from the calculation result (step S1013). Then, the calculation result is stored in the start port information storage counter (step S1014).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the number of processes (step S1015), and determines whether the number of processes is not 0 (step S1016). When the number of processes is not 0 (Y in step S1016), the process proceeds to step S1004. In this embodiment, since the gaming machine includes the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, 2 is set as the initial value of the number of processes, and the processing of steps S1004 to S1016 is 2. Will be executed once.

  If it is determined in step S1016 that the number of processes is 0 (N in step S1016), the CPU 56 sets an initial value (00 (H)) in the information buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S1017). Next, the CPU 56 sets the start port output bit position (bit 1 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 6) of the information output buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S1018). Then, the CPU 56 sets the address of the start port information storage timer in the pointer (step S1019), and executes a winning timer setting process (step S1020).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the winning output bit position (bit 6 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 6) of the information output buffer (step S1021). Then, the CPU 56 sets the address of the winning information storage timer in the pointer (step S1022), and executes a winning timer setting process (step S1023).

  In this embodiment, a common subroutine (winning timer set process) is executed when the start signal is output externally and when the winning signal is output externally, so that the start port output bit position of the information buffer is output. Is set and a start port signal is output, a winning output bit position of the information buffer is set, and a winning signal is output. Details of the winning timer setting process will be described later (see FIG. 54).

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the symbol determination number 1 information timer into the register (step S1031), reflects the state of the symbol determination number 1 information timer in the flag register (step S1032), and the symbol determination number 1 information timer times out. It is determined whether or not (step S1033). In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation processing (see step S303), when the variation time is timed out, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination number 1 information timer outputs the symbol determination number output time (in this example, 0.500 seconds) is set, and when the symbol determination count output time has not elapsed, it is determined that the symbol determination count 1 information timer has not timed out, and when the symbol determination count output time has elapsed (symbol determination count) When the value 1 information timer value is 0), it is determined that the symbol determination time 1 information timer has timed out.

  If the symbol determination count 1 information timer has not timed out (N in step S1033), the symbol determination count 1 information timer is decremented by 1 (step S1034), and the calculation result is stored in the symbol determination count 1 information timer (step S1035). . Then, the design buffer count 1 output bit position of the information buffer (bit 0 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 6) is set (step S1036). When the symbol determination number 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103. Is output from the output port 1 (becomes ON state). If the symbol determination number 1 information timer times out (Y in step S1033), the process of step S1036 is not executed, and as a result, the symbol determination number 1 signal is turned off.

  Each time the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped (the stopped symbol is fixed) by the processing of steps S1031 to S1036 described above, the symbol determination number 1 signal is output as the symbol determination number output time (for example, 500 ms). Turns on.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the special symbol process flag (step S1037), compares the value of the special symbol process flag with the special winning opening opening pre-processing designation value (“5”) (step S1038), and the special symbol process. It is determined whether the value of the flag is less than 5 (step S1039). When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (Y in step S1039), the process proceeds to step S1048. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (N in Step S1039), the output buffer position of the jackpot of the information buffer is set (Step S1040). Further, the big output 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1041). When one output bit position of jackpot and two output bit positions of jackpot of the information buffer are set, the information buffer is set to an output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103. One signal and two jackpot signals are output from the output port 1 (become turned on).

  Further, the CPU 56 compares the value of the special symbol process flag with the small hit release pre-processing designation value (“8”) (step S1042), and determines whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 8 or more ( Step S1043). When the value of the special symbol process flag is 8 or more (Y in step S1043), the process proceeds to step S1048. When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 8 (N in Step S1043), when the type of big hit is not suddenly probable big hit (N in Step S1044A), or the type of big hit is suddenly probable big hit but high base When the suddenness flag is set (Y in step S1044B), if the value of the big hit 3 signal timer is not 0 (N in step S1044C), 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit 3 signal timer (step S1045), If the value of the 3-signal timer is 0 (Y in step S1044C), the 3 output bit positions of the big hit in the information buffer are set (step S1046). When the jackpot 3 output bit position is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103, so that the jackpot 3 signal is output from the output port 1. (Turns on).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a low base check process for confirming whether or not the low base state is set (step S1048), and determines whether or not the low base state is set (step S1049). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines whether or not it is in the low base state by checking whether or not the high base flag that is set when shifting to the high base state is set. When not in the low base state (N in step S1049), that is, when the high base flag is set, the time-short output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1050). When the time-short output bit position is set, the time buffer signal is output from the output port 1 by setting the information buffer to the output value in the subsequent step S1102 and outputting the output value to the output port 1 in step S1103. (Turns on) Further, the big output 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1051). When the jackpot 2 output bit position is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103, whereby the jackpot 2 signal is output from the output port 1. (Turns on).

  By the processing of steps S1037 to S1051 described above, one big hit signal, two big hit signals, three big hit signals and a short time signal corresponding to the type of big hit and the gaming state are output (becomes ON state).

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the security signal information timer (step S1069), reflects the state of the security signal information timer in the flag register (step S1070), and determines whether the security signal information timer has timed out (step S1070). S1071). In this embodiment, it is determined that the detection difference between the second starting port switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b has reached a predetermined value (10 in this example) or more, and it is determined that an abnormal winning is generated at the starting winning port. If the predetermined time (4 minutes in this example) is set in the security signal information timer (see steps S127 and S128 in the switch normality / abnormality check process), and the predetermined time has not elapsed, When it is determined that the signal information timer has not timed out and the predetermined time has elapsed (when the value of the security signal information timer is 0), it is determined that the security signal information timer has timed out.

  In this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization process is executed, a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) is set in the security signal information timer (in the main process). When the predetermined time has not elapsed, it is determined that the security signal information timer has not timed out, and when the predetermined time has elapsed (when the value of the security signal information timer is 0), It is determined that the security signal information timer has timed out.

  If the security signal information timer has not timed out (N in step S1071), the security signal information timer is decremented by 1 (step S1072), and the calculation result is stored in the security signal information timer (step S1073). Then, the security signal output bit position of the information buffer (bit 7 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 6) is set (step S1074). When the security signal output bit position of the information buffer is set, the security signal is output from the output port 1 by setting the information buffer to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and outputting the output value to the output port 1 in the step S1103. Is output (turns on). If the security signal information timer times out (Y in step S1071), the security signal is turned off as a result of the processing in step S1074 not being executed.

  By the processing of steps S1069 to S1074 shown above, initialization processing is executed until 4 minutes have elapsed after the abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 is detected, or at the start of power supply to the gaming machine. Until 30 seconds elapse, a security signal is output using the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. If a new abnormal prize is detected during the output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is continued until 4 minutes have elapsed since the last abnormal prize was detected.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high-accuracy output permission flag is set (step S1075). Note that the high-accuracy output permission flag is set when the hot start process is executed at the start of power supply to the gaming machine (see step S9103). If the high-accuracy medium output permission flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S1076). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 sets the high-accuracy medium signal output bit position (bit 7 of the output port 0 in the example shown in FIG. 6) of the information buffer (step S1077). When the high-accuracy signal output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 0 in step S1103. Output from output port 0 (becomes ON state). In this embodiment, after the power failure recovery, if the first big hit occurs, the high-accuracy output permission flag is reset (see step S136), and as a result, the high-accuracy medium signal is turned off.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the high-accuracy output permission flag is reset when the first big hit occurs. It is not limited to what is shown. For example, the high-accuracy medium output permission flag may be reset even when a small hit occurs. In addition, for example, when it is configured to end the certain variation state based on the fact that the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times after being controlled to the certain variation state, the certain number of variation display is terminated and the certain variation state is displayed. The configuration may be such that the high-accuracy output permission flag is reset when the process ends.

  If the probability variation flag is set after the power failure is restored by the processing of steps S1075 to S1077 described above, the high-probability medium signal is maintained until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, until the first big hit occurs). Is output (turns on). That is, in this embodiment, as already described, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the probability variation flag is held in the backup RAM for a predetermined period. Therefore, if the probability change state was controlled before the occurrence of a power failure, the probability change flag should be retained in the backup RAM. Until then, the output of the high-accuracy signal is continued.

  In this embodiment, when the first big hit occurs, the high-accuracy medium output permission flag is reset (see step S136), so that the high-accuracy medium signal is not output thereafter. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, if the first big hit occurs), the output of the high-accuracy signal is prohibited.

  In this embodiment, only the process of setting the high-accuracy medium output permission flag is performed at the time of executing the power failure recovery process of the main process, and it is confirmed whether or not the probability change flag is set in the information output process of step S31. However, the processing method for outputting the high-accuracy signal is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, it is confirmed whether or not the probability change flag is set in the power failure recovery processing of the main processing, and if it is set, the high accuracy signal output bit position of the information buffer is set or A high accuracy signal may be output by performing processing such as setting a timer. Even when the probability variation flag is checked in the power failure recovery process and the output of the high-accuracy signal is started in this way, the high-level signal is output when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the first big hit occurs. It may be configured to perform control so as to stop the output of the accuracy signal, and to control so as not to output the accuracy signal thereafter.

  In this embodiment, the output bit position of the corresponding signal in the information output processing shown in FIGS. 50 to 53 is set for each timer interrupt (steps S1036, S1040, S1041, S1060, S1046, S1050, S1051). , S1074, and S1077), and steps S1102 and S1103 are executed to externally output from the output ports 0 and 1, with regard to the output state of each signal, the value of the corresponding output bit is set to the previous setting. It will not change unless it changes. For example, if the value of the corresponding output bit is set to “1”, the signal continues to be output while it is set.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the winning timer setting process executed in steps S1020 and S1023 of the information output process. In the winning timer setting process, the CPU 56 first loads the information storage timer pointed to by the pointer (step S2001), reflects the state of the loaded information storage timer in the flag register (step S2002), and a signal is being output. Is determined (step S2003). In this case, when the winning timer set process is executed in step S1020 of the information output process, the start port information storage timer is loaded and the state is reflected in the flag register, and whether or not the start port signal is being output. It will be determined. When the winning timer setting process is executed in step S1023 of the information output process, the winning information storage timer is loaded and the state is reflected in the flag register to determine whether or not the winning signal is being output. Will do.

  The start port information storage timer is a timer for measuring an on time and an off time (for example, an on time of 100 ms and an off time of 100 ms) of the start port signal. If the value of the start port information storage timer is not 0, it is determined that the start port signal is being output. If the value of the start port information storage timer is 0, it is determined that the start port signal is not being output. The winning information storage timer is a timer for measuring an on time and an off time (for example, an on time of 100 ms and an off time of 100 ms) of the winning signal. If the value of the winning information storage timer is not 0, it is determined that the winning signal is being output. If the value of the winning information storage timer is 0, it is determined that the winning signal is not being output.

  If the signal (start port signal or winning signal) is being output (Y in step S2003), the process proceeds to step S2012. If the signal (start port signal or winning signal) is not being output (N in step S2003), the CPU 56 adds 1 to the pointer value (step S2004). In this embodiment, in the ROM 54, the start port information storage counter is set in the area next to the area where the start port information storage timer is set, and the area next to the area where the winning information storage timer is set. Is set with a winning information storage counter. Therefore, by executing the process of step S2004, the pointer value indicates the address of the start port information storage counter or the winning information storage counter.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the information storage counter (starting port information storage counter or winning information storage counter) pointed to by the pointer (step S2005), and the state of the loaded information storage counter (starting port information storage counter or winning information storage counter) Is reflected in the flag register (step S2006), and it is determined whether there is a remaining number of output times of the signal (start port signal or winning signal) (step S2007).

  When the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are turned on (N in step S1009), the start port information storage counter is incremented (the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a). 1 is added if either one is on, and 2 is added if both are on. (See step S1011.) Therefore, it is determined that there is a remaining number of output times of the start port signal. Become. In addition, when a winning is made to any of the winning openings (the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the large winning opening, the normal winning openings 29, 30), the number of planned winning balls is ten. Each time it accumulates, the winning information storage counter is incremented (see step S5122), so it is determined that there is a remaining number of winning signal outputs.

  If there is no remaining number of outputs of the signal (start port signal or winning signal) (Y in step S2007), the winning timer setting process is terminated. If there is a remaining number of output times of the signal (start port signal or winning signal) (N in step S2007), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the upper storage counter (start port information storing counter or winning information storing counter) pointed to by the pointer. (Step S2008) The calculation result (the result obtained by subtracting 1) is stored in the information storage counter (start port information storage counter or winning information storage counter) (Step S2009). Then, the winning information operating time (50) is set in the register (step S2010). The winning information operating time (50) is a time for which a 4 ms timer interrupt is executed 50 times, that is, a time of 0.200 seconds (200 ms). In this embodiment, the case where the same value is set as the winning information operating time is shown when the start opening signal is output and when the winning signal is output. However, different values are set. Also good.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the pointer (step S2011). By executing the processing in step S2011, the pointer value returns to the state indicating the address of the start port information storage timer or the winning information storage timer again. Then, the process proceeds to step S2012.

  Next, if the winning information operating time is not set in step S2010, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the information storage timer (start port information storing timer or winning information storing timer) pointed to by the pointer, and the winning information operating time is determined in step S2010. If it is set, 1 is subtracted from the winning information operating time (step S2012). Then, the calculation result (the result obtained by subtracting 1) is stored in the information storage timer (start port information storage timer or winning information storage timer) pointed to by the pointer (step S2013).

  The CPU 56 compares the calculation result with the winning information on time (25) (step S2014), and determines whether the calculating result is shorter than the winning information on time (step S2015). The winning information ON time (25) is a time for which a 4 ms timer interrupt is executed 25 times, that is, a time of 0.100 seconds (100 ms).

  When the calculation result is not shorter than the winning information on time, that is, when the calculating result (remaining time of the starting information storing timer or the winning information storing timer) is longer than the winning information on time (100 ms) ( In step S2015 N), the CPU 56 loads the information buffer (step S2016), and obtains a logical sum of the loaded information buffer value and the information output buffer value (step S2017). Then, the CPU 56 stores the calculation result of step S2017 in the information buffer (step S2018).

  If the winning timer set process is executed in step S1020 of the information output process by executing the processes of steps S2016 to S2018, the value of the information output buffer in which the start port output bit is set in step S1018 Is obtained, the start port output bit position of the information buffer (bit 1 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 6) is set. When the start port output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in step S1102 of the subsequent information output process, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103. The mouth signal is output from the output port 1.

  Further, when the winning timer set process is executed in step S1023 of the information output process by executing the processes of steps S2016 to S2018, the value of the information output buffer in which the winning output bit is set in step S1011 Is obtained, the winning output bit position of the information buffer (bit 6 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 6) is set. Then, when the winning output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in step S1102 of the subsequent information output processing, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103. Is output from the output port 1.

  Through the information output processing steps S1002 to S1020 and the winning timer setting process shown in FIG. When the 2 start port switch 14a is turned on), a start port signal is output. That is, after the start port signal is turned on for 100 ms, it is turned off for 100 ms. By inputting this start port signal to the hall computer, it is possible to recognize the number of winnings to the first start winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14.

  Since the start port signal is turned on for 100 ms and then turned off for 100 ms, the next start port is turned on after the 100 ms off state even if a start winning is continuously generated in a short time. A signal is output. That is, the start port signals are output with an interval of at least 100 ms.

  Thus, since the start port signals are output at intervals of at least 100 ms, the hall computer can reliably grasp the total number of start winning prizes.

  Further, any of the winning ports (first starting winning port 13, second starting winning port 14, large winning port, normal winning port 29, etc.) is performed by the information output processing steps S1021 to S1023 and the winning timer setting process shown in FIG. A winning signal is output every time the winning number 30) is won and the planned number of winning balls is accumulated. That is, after the winning signal is turned on for 100 ms, it is turned off for 100 ms. By inputting this winning signal to the hall computer, the expected number of winning balls can be recognized.

  Since the winning signal is turned on for 100 ms and then turned off for 100 ms, even if a start winning is continuously generated in a short time, the next winning signal is displayed after the off state for 100 ms. Is output. In other words, the winning signals are output with an interval of at least 100 ms.

  Thus, the winning signals are output at intervals of at least 100 ms, so that the hall computer can reliably grasp the total number of planned winning balls.

  In this embodiment, when the winning signal is output to the outside, first, the processing of step S2012 is executed to subtract the value of the winning information storage timer, and then the winning signals are executed by executing steps S2018, S1102, and S1103. However, the processing order of the subtraction processing of the winning information storage timer and the external output processing of the winning signal is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, first, the same processing as in steps S2018, S1102, and S1103 is executed to execute the external output processing of the winning signal, and then the same processing as in step S2012 is performed to subtract the value of the winning information storage timer. Also good.

  Next, the output timing of the high-accuracy signal will be described. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the output timing of the high-accuracy signal. In this embodiment, when the hot start process is executed at the start of power supply to the gaming machine (see step S91), the information output is based on the fact that the high-accuracy output permission flag is set (see step S9103). In the process (see step S31), the processes of steps S1075 to S1103 are executed, and as shown in FIG. 55, the output of the high-accuracy signal to the external device such as the hall computer is started from the connector CN9 of the terminal board 160. Is done.

  Thereafter, the game control process can be executed, and when a game is performed by the player, as shown in FIG. 55, the variable display is executed in accordance with the start winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 Is done. In this case, even if the fluctuation display is executed, if the fluctuation display result is “out of range”, the information output process (see step S31) is performed in step S1075 based on the fact that the high-accuracy output permission flag is maintained. Through the process of S1103, the output of the high-accuracy signal is continued.

  When the first big hit occurs as a result of the variable display, the high-accuracy output permission flag is reset at the end of the variable display (see step S136). Thereafter, when it is determined as N in step S1075 of the information output process (see step S31), the processes of steps S1076 and S1077 are not executed, and the output of the high-accuracy signal is stopped as shown in FIG.

  Next, the security signal output timing will be described. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing the output timing of the security signal. In this embodiment, when initialization processing is executed at the start of power supply to the gaming machine (see steps S10 to S14), a predetermined time (in this example, 30 seconds) is set in the security signal information timer. Based on the above (see step S14a), the processing of steps S1069 to S1074, S1102, and S1103 is executed in the information output process (see step S31), and as shown in FIG. 56 (A), from the connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. A security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. Further, after the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the detection error between the detection number of the start port switch 14a and the detection number of the winning confirmation switch 14b becomes a predetermined value (10 in this example) or more. Even when it is determined that an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 has occurred (see steps S121 to S127), a predetermined time (4 minutes in this example) is set in the security signal information timer. Based on the above (see step S128), the information output process (see step S31) performs the processes of steps S1069 to S1074, S1102, and S1103, and from the connector CN8 of the terminal board 160 as shown in FIG. A security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. As described above, in this embodiment, the common terminal board 160 is used when the initialization process is executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started and when the abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 is detected. A security signal is externally output from the connector CN8.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the security signal is being output to the outside, when an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is newly detected, the security signal output period is substantially extended, Finally, the output of the security signal is continued until a predetermined time (4 minutes in this example) has elapsed since the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 was detected. For example, in the case where the output of the security signal is started based on the fact that the initialization process is executed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), until 30 seconds elapse. Security signal output should continue. However, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the detection error between the number of detections of the second start port switch 14a and the number of detections of the winning confirmation switch 14b is a predetermined value (this In the example, there is a possibility that it becomes 10) or more and it is determined that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred. In this case, a predetermined time (4 minutes in this example) is overwritten and written in the security signal information timer based on the detection of the occurrence of the abnormal winning (see step S128), and the information output process (step S31). In step S1069 to S1074, S1102, and S1103, the security signal is output as it is as shown in FIG. 56B. However, since the value of the security signal information timer has been overwritten to 4 minutes, in this case, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), 4 minutes have elapsed since the abnormal winning at the start winning opening 14 was detected. Until then, the output of the security signal is continued, and the output of the security signal is substantially extended.

  Further, for example, in the case where the output of the security signal is started based on the detection of the abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), until 4 minutes elapse in principle. Security signal output should continue. However, as shown in FIG. 56C, even before the lapse of 4 minutes, the detection error between the number of detections of the second start port switch 14a and the number of detections of the winning confirmation switch 14b is a predetermined value (this In the example, 10) or more, there is a possibility that it is determined that a new abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred. In this case, a predetermined time (4 minutes in this example) is overwritten and written in the security signal information timer based on the newly detected occurrence of an abnormal winning (see step S128), and information output processing ( In step S31), the processing of steps S1069 to S1074, S1102, and S1103 is executed, and the output of the security signal is continued as shown in FIG. 56C. However, since the value of the security signal information timer is overwritten in 4 minutes, in this case, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), from the time when the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is newly detected. The output of the security signal is continued until 4 minutes have elapsed, and the output of the security signal is substantially extended.

  If an abnormal winning to the second start winning port 14 is detected while the security signal is already being output, the output of the security signal being output is terminated and the next security signal is output again. However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 (B) and 56 (C), by extending the output time of the security signal being output as it is, The processing load for the output processing of the security signal is reduced and the program capacity for the output processing of the security signal is reduced. In other words, when it is configured to start the output of the next security signal after the output of the security signal being output is completed, the output of the next security signal is started after the output of the security signal is completed. For example, a process for measuring the interval time until completion is required, which increases the processing load and the program capacity. In contrast, in this embodiment, since the value of the security signal information timer is overwritten as it is, if only the process of setting the value of the security signal information timer is performed (see steps S14a and S128), the security signal is output. It is possible to prevent the increase in processing load and program capacity.

  Next, the output timing of three jackpot signals will be described. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the output timing of three jackpot signals. FIG. 57 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the output timing of three jackpot signals at the time of sudden appearance jackpot. FIG. 57 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the output timing of three jackpot signals at the time of sudden probability variation jackpot. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in this embodiment, when a sudden appearance big hit occurs (see step S135C), the big hit three-signal timer has a long period of time in the open pattern data corresponding to the sudden appearance big hit (this In the example, a value corresponding to the time until the opening control is started is set (for 29.5 seconds) (see step S136), and based on the value of the jackpot three-signal timer becoming 0 (Y in step S1044C) ), The processing of steps S1044A to S1046, S1102, and S1103 is executed in the information output processing (see step S31), and from the connector CN5 of the terminal board 160 to an external device such as a hall computer as shown in FIG. Three jackpot signals are output. Therefore, the three big hit signals are outputted after the big winning opening suddenly operates in the same manner as the probability variation big hit or small hit. Therefore, while the big winning opening is controlled in the same manner of operation, the player is based on the operation of the external device due to the output of the three big hits, while the sudden winning big hit, the sudden appearance big hit, and the small win are controlled in the same manner of operation. Thus, it is possible to prevent recognition of sudden occurrence of big odd hits, sudden appearance big hits, or small hits. Note that an external device such as a hall computer turns on the lamp or updates the number of jackpots based on the input of three jackpot signals. The external device updates the number of jackpots when three jackpot signals output at the timing shown in FIG. 57A (that is, at a timing delayed compared to the timing of starting the jackpot game) are input. It may be configured as follows. As shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b), when the jackpot 3 signal starts to be output, the jackpot game based on the sudden probability variation jackpot is finished, so the jackpot 3 based on the occurrence of the sudden probability variation jackpot. No signal is output. However, the time from the start of the big hit game to the start of the output of the three jackpot signals is set to a time shorter than the time from the start to the end of the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit. The jackpot may be configured to output three jackpot signals based on the above.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 18 and 19) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  60 to 64 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read out.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 sets a display result designation command reception flag (step S618A). Further, the production control CPU 101 stores the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618B).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S622). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag (step S624).

  In this embodiment, the big hit start 1 designation command reception flag, big hit start 2 designation command reception flag, and small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag set in steps S622 and S624 are designated as fanfare flags. Also called.

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (step S644). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S652). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S653).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S654), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S655). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory display unit 18d in accordance with the updated second reserved memory number (step S656).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S658). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S659).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S660), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S661). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number on the second reserved memory display unit 18d according to the updated second reserved memory number (step S662).

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag (step S663A). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S664). In addition, the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed immediately based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the customer waits for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The display of the waiting demonstration screen may be started. Further, the production control CPU 101 clears the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step S665). That is, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received and the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are 0, and the variable display is not executed. Reset the number of pending storage to be stored. Even if the processing of step S665 is executed and the production control microcomputer 100 is in a state in which the addition or subtraction omission of the reserved memory number occurs and the erroneous reserved memory number is recognized, the reserved memory is stored. Can be reset to return to the normal state.

  If the received effect control command is the normal state background designation command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the common effect in-process flag indicating that the common effect is being executed is set. (Step S667). If the common effect flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 to a common effect background screen (for example, a yellow display color background screen) (step S668). ). If the common effect flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color background screen) (step). S669). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a probability change state flag indicating that the game state is a probability change state and a time reduction state flag indicating that the game state is a time reduction state (step S670).

  If the received effect control command is a certain change state background designation command (step S671), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the common effect flag indicating that the common effect is being executed is set. (Step S672). If the common effect flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 to a common effect background screen (for example, a yellow display color background screen) (step S673A). ). If the common effect flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a red display color background screen) corresponding to the probability change state (step). S673B). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability change state flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state (step S674).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction state background designation command (step S675), the effect control CPU 101 displays a background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the time reduction state (for example, a green display). Color background screen) (step S676). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag (step S677). If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy base state background designation command (step S678), the effect control CPU 101 displays a background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the low-accuracy base state (for example, , A purple display color background screen) (step S679). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag (step S680).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processes of steps S667, S668, S672, and S673A, the presence / absence of the common effect flag is determined based on the reception of the normal state background designation command and the probability variation state background designation command. However, the start timing of the common effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the common effect may be started by judging the flow of processing. Good. For example, when the big hit game is ended (specifically, when the big hit end effect process described later is ended) or when the small hit game is ended (specifically, a step of the effect symbol fluctuation stop process described later) The background screen to be displayed on the effect display device 9 according to the same processing as steps S668 and S673A when the effect of the predetermined effect period is ended according to the process data for the small hit effect set in S8307) A common effect may be started by performing a process of changing to (for example, a yellow display color background screen). With such a configuration, even when the next variation display cannot be started immediately after the big hit game or the small hit game is finished and no new holding memory is generated during the big hit game or the small hit game, the big hit game or the small hit game can be started. A common effect can be started immediately after the winning game is finished, and it can be made unrecognizable whether or not it is in a probable state.

  Also, in this embodiment, the case of sudden transition to a common effect triggered by a probable big hit or a small win has been shown. However, the game machine is not limited to such a game machine. It is a big hit where the big prize opening is opened, and the big hit that is controlled to the short time state after the big hit game is finished. In a gaming machine, when a sudden shortfall is hit suddenly, the execution period of the common effect may be shifted. In this case as well, the common effect may be started upon receipt of the background designation command, or when the jackpot game based on the sudden short / big hit is terminated (for example, when the jackpot end effect is terminated), as described above. In addition, a process for changing the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen for common effects (for example, a yellow display color background screen) according to the same process as steps S668 and S676 is started. You may make it do.

  Also, for example, a so-called sudden normal big hit (a big hit that is opened for a very small number of times or for a short period of time, and a big hit that is controlled to the normal state after the big hit game is finished. In a game machine that is configured to be controllable even if the game is configured to be in a normal state after ending the game, it may be shifted to the execution period of the common performance when suddenly a normal big hit is made. Good. In this case as well, the common effect may be started upon receipt of the background designation command, or when the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot suddenly ends (for example, when the jackpot end effect ends), as described above. In addition, a process for changing the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen for common effects (for example, a yellow display color background screen) according to the same process as steps S668 and S676 is started. You may make it do.

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S681), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening open designation command has been received ( In step S682), the received special winning opening open designation command is stored in the special winning opening open designated command storage area formed in the RAM (step S683).

  If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (step S684), the production control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening indicating that the designation command after opening the big prize opening has been received ( In step S685), the received designation command after opening the special winning opening is stored in the designated command storage area after opening the special winning opening formed in the RAM (step S686).

  If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designation commands (step S687), the effect control CPU 101 determines the winning determination result (whether it is a big hit or a small hit, The determination result of the big hit type) is saved in the determination result storage buffer at the time of winning (step S688). Then, the production control CPU 101 sets a symbol designation command reception flag indicating that the symbol designation command has been received (step S689).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S690). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a continuous notice effect determination process (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing continuous notice effect determination processing (step S800A). In the continuous notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a big hit game is being played (step S6000). Whether or not the big hit game is in progress, for example, confirms whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value (specifically, 4 to 7) indicating the big hit display process to the big hit end effect process. Can be determined. If the game is a big hit game, the process is terminated.

  If it is not during the big hit game, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the symbol designation command reception flag is set (step S6001). If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. If set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the symbol designation command reception flag (step S6002), and executes processing for determining the continuous notice effect after step S6003. Therefore, in this embodiment, at the timing when a new start prize is generated and a symbol designation command is received, the continuous notice effect is determined based on the fact that the symbol designation command reception flag is set in step S6001. .

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the continuous notice execution flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is already being executed is set (step S6003). The continuous advance notice execution flag is set in step S6020 described later. If the continuous notice execution flag is set, the processing is terminated as it is.

  Note that, by executing the process of step S6003, in this embodiment, the determination process of the continuous notice effect is executed on condition that the continuous notice effect is not being executed. Since the continuous notice execution flag is already set after the start of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is executed in the already determined effect form without executing the determination process of the continuous notice effect again. The In addition, if a super-reach or a winning prize that is a big hit occurs while running a continuous notice effect based on the determination result at the time of winning a “non-reach”, the super-reach is switched from the continuous notice effect that is being executed. Or a jackpot effect (for example, a reach notice or a jackpot notice) may be executed.

  If the continuous advance notice execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the total value of the number of reserved memories is 5 or more (step S6004). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 calculates the total value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area. And determine whether the total value obtained is 5 or more. If the total value of the number of reserved memories is 5 or more, the process is terminated as it is. That is, in this embodiment, the determination process of the continuous notice effect is performed when the total number of reserved memories is 4 or less, and the continuous notice effect is not executed when five or more reserved memories are accumulated. Restricted. Note that the process of step S6004 may not be executed, and the execution of the continuous notice effect may not be limited depending on whether or not five or more reserved memories are accumulated.

  If the total value of the number of reserved memories is not 5 or more, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the received symbol designation command is a symbol 1 designation command (command C4000 (H): detachment designation), symbol 2 designation command (command C4001 (H)). : 15R probability variable jackpot designation) or symbol 3 designation command (command C4002 (H): 15R normal jackpot designation) is confirmed (step S6009). If it is a symbol 1 to 3 designation command, the process proceeds to step S6011. If it is not the design 1 to 3 designation command (N in step S6009), that is, the design 4 designation command (command C4003 (H): sudden appearance apparent jackpot designation), the symbol 5 designation command (command C4004 (H): sudden probability variation jackpot designation) ) Or a symbol 6 designation command (command C4005 (H): small hit designation), the continuous notice non-execution flag is set (step S6010), and the process proceeds to step S6021.

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of step S6009, the continuous notice effect is not executed for the fluctuating display that becomes “abrupt probable big hit”, “suddenly promising big hit”, and “small hit”. In the case of “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, the big prize opening is opened, but the opening time is very short, and almost no big prize winning is expected. Therefore, by not performing the continuous notice effect for “suddenly promising big hits” and “small hits”, the expectation will be raised more than necessary for hits where winnings to the big prize opening can hardly be expected. To prevent the expectation of the continuous notice effect from being reduced.

  In addition, it is difficult to predict the occurrence of “abrupt appearance big hit” depending on whether or not the continuous notice effect is executed.

  In step S6011, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the winning determination result stored in the winning determination result storage buffer in step S688 (step S6011), and confirms whether the probability change state flag is set (step S6011). S6013). If the probability change state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table A as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step S6014). If the probability variation state flag is set, the production control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table B (step S6015).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the continuous notice effect for determining the effect form of the continuous notice effect (step S6018). Then, based on the received variation category command, the effect control CPU 101 matches the extracted value of the continuous notice effect mode determination random number with any determination value included in the continuous notice distribution table selected in steps S6014 and S6015. By determining whether or not to execute, the presence / absence and execution mode of the continuous notice effect are determined (step S6019), and the continuous notice execution flag is set (step S6020).

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a continuous notice distribution table showing distribution of continuous notice effects. If the current gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 101 for effect control uses the received symbol designation command (more specifically) using the continuous notice allocation table A in the normal state shown in FIG. 67 (A) selected in step S6014. Specifically, based on the winning determination result extracted in step S6011, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table A is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the symbol designation command indicates “out of” (specifically, the command C400 (H ) Is received), as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the continuous notice effect of either effect mode of “change of the change pattern at the time of symbol change” or “mode shift” is executed. To decide. Also, for example, when the design control command 101 indicates that “15R normal big hit” is given (specifically, when the command C401 (H) is received), the effect control CPU 101 As shown in 67 (A), it is determined to execute a continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition”, or “change in reserved ball”. Further, for example, when the design control CPU 101 indicates that “15R probability variation big hit” is indicated (specifically, when the command C402 (H) is received), the effect control CPU 101 As shown in 67 (A), it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect of any one of the effect modes of “change of the change pattern at the time of symbol change”, “mode shift”, “flash” or “change of the holding ball”. To do.

  The specific contents of the production modes of the respective continuous notice effects of “change in change mode at the time of symbol change”, “mode shift”, “flash”, and “change in reserved ball” will be described later.

  Also, if the current gaming state is the probability change state, the effect control CPU 101 uses the effect control CPU 101 using the continuous notice allocation table B in the probability change state shown in FIG. 67 (B) selected in step S6014. Based on the received symbol designation command, the production mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table B is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the symbol designation command indicates “out of” (specifically, the command C400 (H ) Is received), as shown in FIG. 67 (B), there is no allocation to any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice. Also, for example, when the design control command 101 indicates that “15R normal big hit” is given (specifically, when the command C401 (H) is received), the effect control CPU 101 As shown in FIG. 67 (B), it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” or “change in reserved ball”. Further, for example, when the design control CPU 101 indicates that “15R probability variation big hit” is indicated (specifically, when the command C402 (H) is received), the effect control CPU 101 As shown in FIG. 67 (A), it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change”, “flash”, or “change in reserved ball”.

  In addition, when it is determined not to execute the continuous notice effect because there is no allocation in the continuous notice distribution tables A and B, control is performed so as not to execute the processes of steps S6020 and S6021 described later.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets the current reserved memory number in the variation counter (step S6021). In this case, the production control CPU 101 obtains the total value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area. The obtained total value is set in the fluctuation counter. Note that the variation count counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays that are executed before the variation display for which the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed during the change display of the effect symbol and the change counter is set in step S6021, the change display during the execution is ended first. Sometimes, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 (see step S8316), and as a result, the variation counter is 0 until the variation display immediately before the variation display subjected to the winning determination, and the continuous notice effect is obtained. Ends. In step S6021, when the variation of the effect symbol is not being displayed, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 101 sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current reserved storage number in the variation counter. If configured in this way, the continuous notice effect can be ended until the variation display immediately before the variation display subject to the determination at the time of winning, and the variation display subjected to the determination at the time of winning is determined. It is possible to prevent both the continuous notice effect and the super reach effect from being performed in order to make the effect unduly unnatural.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. The display will not start.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 does not reach the chance symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream. The combination of the big hit symbol of the object and the symbol in which one symbol is shifted) is also determined. In addition, when it is determined that the production control CPU 101 executes the continuous production of the production mode of “change in the variation pattern at the time of design fluctuation”, the so-called chance symbol design (for example, “ A combination of symbols that are not reachable, such as “223” and “445”, but that is not one reach and one symbol is shifted). The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 70, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit” or “15R normal big hit” (15R big hit) (the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command or In the case of a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same as the stop symbol. When the received display result designation command indicates “abrupt probable big hit”, “sudden probability change big hit” or “small hit” (the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command, a display result 5 designation command or In the case of a display result 6 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Then, when executing the variation pattern and the notice effect (continuous notice effect), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect (step S8003). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8004).

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation aspect constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 71 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  If it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed and the continuous notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the continuous notice effect in step S8003.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effects device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component as an effect component) The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect part is executed (step S8005). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. In addition, for example, when performing a pseudo-continuous effect or a notice effect, an effect of moving the movable member or the effect wing accessory by driving the motor is performed.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8006). Next, the production control CPU 101 deletes the first winning determination result stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (winning determination result (design specifying command) corresponding to the variable display executed this time) and wins the prize. The contents of the determination result storage buffer are shifted (step S8007).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice execution flag is set (step S8106). If the continuous notice execution flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the effect form determined in the continuous notice effect mode determining process in step S6019, “change of variation mode at the time of symbol change”, “mode shift”, Control is performed to execute the continuous notice effect in the effect mode of “flash” or “holding ball change” (step S8107). In addition, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect, specifically, the continuous notice effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the change of the effect symbol. The Further, when executing the continuous notice effect, it is determined as Y in step S8106 at the timing of executing the continuous notice effect, and the process of step S8107 is executed. Then, it is repeatedly determined as Y in step S8106 until the continuous notice effect is finished, and the process of step S8107 is executed.

  It should be noted that the CPU 101 for effect control executes the normal notice effect by executing the effect control based on the data set in the process table when the effect is proceeding based on the process table including the normal notice effect. It will be.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8108), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8109).

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (offset symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302). When neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the lost symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8315.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S8305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and according to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Execution of control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect part, the various lamps as the effect part, and the speaker 27 as the effect part) is started according to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1).

  The effect control CPU 101 suddenly has a promising big hit or a small hit (Y in step S8309), and if the probability changing state flag and the short time state flag are not set (N in step S8310, N in S8311), the common effect flag is set. (Step S8312). If it is not sudden change big hit or small hit (N in step S8313), if it is set, the common effect flag is reset (step S8313), and if the probability change state flag or the time reduction state flag is not set (Y in step S8310) Or Y of S8311), the process proceeds to step S8314. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8314).

  If it is determined that neither big hit nor small hit is made (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the continuous notice non-execution flag or the continuous notice execution flag is set. (Step S8315). If the continuous notice non-execution flag or the continuous notice execution flag is set (Y in step S8315), the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S8316), and the value of the variation counter after subtraction is 0. If this is the case (Y in step S8317), the continuous notice non-execution flag or the continuous notice execution flag is reset (step S8318).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8319). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation designation command reception flag, a second symbol variation designation command reception flag, and a display result designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 68, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, because the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process or the like at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset at the end of the big hit or at the end of the big hit effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8320).

  74 to 77 show modifications of the present embodiment. In the embodiment described above, the output of the three jackpot signals is started at the timing based on the value of the jackpot three signal timer set in the process of step S136 and subtracted in the process of step S1045. On the other hand, in this modification, the following processing is performed instead of the processing of steps S135C to S136 and S1044A to S1045.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the pre-opening process for the special winning opening. In this modified example, when the value of the open / close time timer set in the process of step S1408 in the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is a value corresponding to a long time (29.5 seconds in this example) (in step S1408A). Y), the big hit 3 signal output flag is set (step S1408B). When the big hit game based on the 15R normal big hit or the 15R probability variable big hit is started, the big hit three signal output flag is set in the process of step S1408B.

  FIGS. 75 and 76 are flowcharts showing a modified example of the special winning opening opening process. In this modified example, when the value of the open / close time timer set in the process of step S1459 in the special prize opening opening process is a value corresponding to a long time (29.5 seconds in this example) (in step S1459A). Y), the big hit 3 signal output flag is set (step S1459B). During the big hit game based on the stubborn appearance big hit, when starting to open the big winning opening for a long time, the big hit three signal output flag is set in the process of step S1408B. Note that, in the process of step S1059A, when ten game balls win the big winning opening before the value of the opening / closing time timer set in the process of step S1459 becomes a value corresponding to the long time, the process of step S1059B You may transfer to processing.

  The jackpot three-signal output flag is reset when the opening control of the jackpot during the jackpot game ends (step S1471A).

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a modification of the information output process. In this modified example, the type of big hit is not suddenly sudden change big hit (N in Step S1044D), that is, the type of big hit is 15R normal big hit, 15R positive big hit, or sudden appearance big hit, When the three-signal output flag is set (Y in step S1044G), the process proceeds to step S1046, and three jackpot signals are output. When the big hit type is suddenly a probable big hit (Y in Step S1044D), when the high base rush accuracy flag is set (Y in Step S1044E) and the value of the special symbol process flag is 7 (That is, when the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit ends) (Y of step S1044F), the process proceeds to step S1046, and three big hit signals are output. It should be noted that when a sudden odd-change big hit occurs, three big hits may not be output.

  Next, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous notice effect will be described. 78-81 is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. Among these, FIG. 78 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”. FIG. 79 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode change”. FIG. 80 shows a specific example of the production mode of the “flash” continuous notice effect. FIG. 81 shows a specific example of the effect of the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change”. In addition, in FIGS. 78-81, the aspect of an effect screen changes in order of (1) (2) (3) .... In the example shown in FIGS. 78 to 81, the winning determination is made with respect to the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, and the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, a continuous notice effect is shown, but the determination at the time of winning is made for the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, and the change of the effect symbol is synchronized with the change display of the second special symbol. Even when the continuous notice effect is performed while the display is being executed, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner.

  First, with reference to FIG. 78, the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the continuous notice effect of "change of the change form at the time of design change" is demonstrated. In the example shown in FIG. 78, first, as shown in FIG. 78 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 78 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S216A). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command) corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (see step S217A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 78 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the symbol designation command, and also determines “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. (See step S800A). Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 78 (1) and 78 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 78 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 78 (4), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (5), the variation time ends and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In the case shown in FIG. 78 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 78 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 78 (6), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 78 (6), a predetermined effect is performed such as displaying an aspect in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change (see step S8107). 78 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 78, and for example, a movable member (for example, a character or the like) provided above, below or on the side of the effect display device 9 is simulated. The movable object having the shape described above may be moved at the start of fluctuation, or a predetermined lamp may be turned on or blinked at the start of fluctuation. Further, for example, the way of starting the change of the design at the start of the change of the effect design may be made different from normal. For example, in the case where the left, middle, and right production symbols usually start to change at the same time, the left, middle, and right production symbols start to change at different timings, or once start to change upward (or downward) It is also possible to start the fluctuation downward (or upward) as shown in FIG. Conversely, in FIG. 78 (5), the way of stopping the variation of the symbols may be different from the normal one. For example, the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, but the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, middle, and right.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (7), the effect symbol variation display is executed (see step S8105), and as shown in FIG. 78 (8), the variation time ends and the chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed ( Step S8302). 78 (6) and (7), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 78 (8).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 78 (9), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 78 (9), a predetermined effect is performed such as displaying an aspect in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change (see step S8107). Also in the case shown in FIG. 78 (9), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Thereafter, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect of the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 78, during the execution of the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, and the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed. When the stop display is performed, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is also stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is continuously displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol until the next variable display is started. Therefore, in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, the variation of the fourth symbol is always displayed, or the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped. This also applies to the case where the continuous notice effect is executed in the effect modes shown in FIGS. 78 to 81 described below. Further, when the game state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, the display in the fourth symbol display area may not be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode shift” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 79, first, as shown in FIG. 79 (2), when the effect symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 79 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S216A). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command) corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (see step S217A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 79 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the continuous notice effect is to be executed and “mode shift” has been decided as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command. (See step S800A). Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 79 (1) and 79 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 79 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 79 (4), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100, during the effect symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 79 (4), An effect in which another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, a sea background screen and a mountain background) The effect of a mode that makes the screen crawl together is executed (see step S8107). Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (5), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8107), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 79 ( In 5), the dissociation symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 79 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 79 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 79 (6), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 79 (6). In the display screen, another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen, and the two background screens collide with each other (for example, the sea background screen and the mountain background screen meet each other) Such an effect) is executed (see step S8107). Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (7), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8107), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 79 (7)). In step 7), the off symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 79 (6), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 79 (7), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 79 (8), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 79 (8). In the display screen, another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen, and the two background screens collide with each other (for example, the sea background screen and the mountain background screen meet each other) Such an effect) is executed (see step S8107). Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (9), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8107), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 79 (9)). In 9), the off symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 79 (8), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 79 (9).

  In the above-described manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect of the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed. In this case, when the display result of the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is “big hit”, for example, after performing an effect in such a manner that two background screens are clashing, Alternatively, the background screen that has interrupted from the side wins and the background screen is switched, and the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In addition, the mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode transition” is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, instead of being pushed back to the original background screen at the end of each change display, You may make it perform the effect of the aspect from which a background screen changes for every display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a specific example of the production mode of the “flash” continuous notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 80, first, as shown in FIG. 80 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 80 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S216A). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command) corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (see step S217A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 80 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect and determines “flash” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command. (See step S800A). Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 80 (1) and 80 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 80 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 80 (4), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “flash” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect during the effect symbol change display as shown in FIG. An effect of lighting and displaying the flash lamp 110 disposed on the upper left of the display device 9 in such a manner as to flash for a short time is executed (see step S8107). Note that the flash lamp 110 may be turned on and an effect such as the appearance of a character such as a butterfly may be performed. Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 80 (5), the final stop symbol (the off symbol in FIG. 80 (5)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 80 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 80 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 80 (6), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “flash” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect display device 9 in the upper left corner during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. An effect of lighting and displaying in such a manner that the flash lamp 110 arranged in the direction is flashed for a short time is executed (see step S8107). Note that the flash lamp 110 may be turned on and an effect such as the appearance of a character such as a butterfly may be performed. Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 80 (7), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 80 (7)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 80 (6), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 80 (7).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 80 (8), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “flash” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect display device 9 at the upper left during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. An effect of lighting and displaying in such a manner that the flash lamp 110 arranged in the direction is flashed for a short time is executed (see step S8107). Note that the flash lamp 110 may be turned on and an effect such as the appearance of a character such as a butterfly may be performed. Also in the case shown in FIG. 80 (8), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol.

  In the above-described manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started.

  Note that the notice effect of the “flash” effect mode shown in FIG. 80 may be executed, for example, only when it is determined that a big hit will be made. It may be executed only once during a specific variation display. Moreover, it is not selected as the effect mode of the normal continuous notice effect, and may be executed only during the first to fourth variation display during the big hit game or after the big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 81, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 81 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S216A). Then, a winning determination result designation command (symbol designation command) corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (see step S218A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 81 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command, and decides the “reserved ball change” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. (See step S800A). Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 81 (1) and 81 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 81 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 81 (4), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 81 (4), the production control microcomputer 100 displays the variation of the production symbol based on the fact that “reserved ball change” is determined as the production mode of the continuous notice production. Then, the display of the first reserved memory number which is the object of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is changed to a display of a different form (star display in the example shown in FIG. 81 (4)). Step S8107). In the example shown in FIG. 81, after the determination at the time of winning is performed, the case where the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “reserved ball change” is started from the time of the next start of variation display is shown. When the determination result designation command is received (at the timing when the start winning is generated), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is changed to a display different from the normal display and the continuous notice effect is performed. You may make it start. Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 81 (5), the final stop symbol (disconnected symbol in FIG. 81 (5)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In addition, as shown in FIG. 81 (5), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a different form (FIG. 81). 81 (5), star display). Also in the case shown in FIG. 81 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 81 (5), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 81 (6), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, the production control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that "holding ball change" is determined as the production mode, as shown in FIG. In the display unit 18c, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is continued in a display different from the normal display (star display in the example shown in FIG. 81 (6)) (see step S8107). Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 81 (7), the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 81 (7)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). In addition, as shown in FIG. 81 (7), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a different form (FIG. 81). 81 (7) is a star display). Also in the case shown in FIG. 81 (6), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 81 (7).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 81 (8), in the first reserved memory display section 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S659), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “holding ball change” has been determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the first hold storage during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 81 (8). In the display unit 18c, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is continuously displayed in a different form (star display in the example shown in FIG. 81 (8)) (see step S8107). Then, the fluctuation time is ended, and the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 81 (9)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (9) (see step S8302). In addition, as shown in FIG. 81 (9), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a mode different from normal (FIG. 81 (9), star display). Also in the case shown in FIG. 81 (8), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 81 (9).

  In the above-described manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, a signal (specifically, three jackpot signals) output to the outside of the gaming machine is output after delaying the type of jackpot, based on the signal. It is possible to prevent the jackpot type from being recognized by the player at an early stage. In addition, since a high probability signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine at the start of power supply, the work burden when initializing the gaming machine is reduced, and inconvenience in operating the gaming machine at the gaming store is avoided. The game state can be recognized by the player who starts the game when the power is turned on.

  In addition, when it is determined in the determination process at the time of winning that a sudden change big hit or a small win will occur, a continuous notice effect is not executed, so the game is based on a signal output to the outside of the gaming machine. Even if the person is prevented from recognizing the jackpot type at an early stage, it is possible to prevent a situation where the jackpot type is recognized at an early stage in the continuous notice effect.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, even in the round 1 of the big hit game based on the sudden appearance of the big hit game, the time big winning opening that can be expected to win is controlled so that it can be based on the 15R normal big hit or the 15R positive big hit. Compared to the big hit game, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the number of rounds in which game balls win.

  According to the present embodiment, the winning signal is output to the payout control microcomputer 370 based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14. The gaming state when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied can be accurately grasped externally without increasing the control burden on the gaming machine.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is turned on and the initialization process is executed, the security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts performed when the gaming machine is powered on.

  Note that the jackpot game may be configured to output four jackpot signals during the jackpot game based on the jackpot that shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends and when the game is controlled to the time-shortening state. As for the big hit 4 signals, it is desirable that the output timing is delayed according to the type of the big hit, similarly to the 3 big hit signals.

  The present invention can be suitably applied to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 13a 1st starting opening switch 14a 2nd starting opening switch 14b Winning confirmation switch 15 Variable winning ball apparatus 31 Game control board (main board)
37 Dispensing control board 56 CPU
80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
160 Terminal Board 370 Discharge Control Microcomputer 371 Discharge Control CPU
380 Serial communication circuit (withdrawal control side)
505 Serial communication circuit (game control side)
560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

After the game medium has passed through the start area, variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other is started on the basis that a start condition that allows the start of variable display is satisfied, and the display result is derived and displayed. A gaming machine comprising a display unit and capable of shifting to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display unit;
The specific game state has a first specific game state and a second specific game state having different degrees of advantage,
A variable winning device that changes between a first state in which game media can enter and a second state in which game media cannot enter;
Advantageous gaming state signal external output means for outputting an advantageous gaming state signal to the outside of the gaming machine when being controlled to the second specific gaming state;
In the first specific gaming state, the variable winning device is controlled with a first pattern, while in the second specific gaming state, the variable winning device is controlled with the first pattern, and then the first pattern is Variable winning device control means for controlling the variable winning device with a different second pattern,
The advantageous gaming state signal external output means outputs the advantageous gaming state signal to the outside of the gaming machine after the variable winning device is controlled in the first pattern in the second specific gaming state,
The gaming machine further includes:
A payout execution means for paying out game media based on a predetermined payout condition being satisfied;
A payout condition establishment signal for outputting a payout condition establishment signal indicating that the predetermined payout condition for paying out a predetermined number of game media is established to the outside of the gaming machine when the predetermined payout condition is established A gaming machine comprising an external output means.

Images